Liebert CRV User Manual PDF

Liebert® CRV™ Row-Based Cooling System
A SmartAisle™ Technology
User Manual–60Hz
600mm Wide Air-Cooled, Water/Glycol-Cooled and Chilled Water Units
300mm Wide Air-Cooled Units
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 LIEBERT CRV COMPONENT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.0 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2.1 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.1 SmartAisle™ Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.0 INSPECTION AND UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 Equipment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1.1 Packing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2.1 Handling the Unit While it is Packaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3 Moving the Unit Using Rigging—600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4 Unpacking the Liebert CRV—600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Removing the Unit from the Skid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6 Reattaching the Baffle Panel—600mm (24") Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.7 Uncrating and Removing the Liebert CRV from the Skid—300mm (12") DX Units . . . . . . 18
4.0 PREPARING THE LIEBERT CRV FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.0 PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
5.1 Fluid Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2 Refrigeration and Hydraulic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.1 Condensate Drain Piping—Field-Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.2.2 Gravity Drain—Units Without Factory-Installed Condensate Pump—600mm (24")
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.2.3 Gravity Drain—300mm (12") DX Units Without Factory-Installed Condensate Pump . . . . 28
5.2.4 Humidifier Supply Water—Optional Steam Generating Canister—600mm (24")
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.2.5 Requirements of Systems Using Water or Glycol—600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.0 REFRIGERANT CONNECTIONS FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.1 Piping Guidelines—Air-Cooled Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2 Refrigerant Piping—Air-Cooled Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3 Liebert MC Condenser Selection—600mm (24") and 300mm (12")CRV Units. . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.4 Liebert Fin/Tube Condenser Selection—600mm (24") Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.5 General Piping Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.5.1 Heat Rejection Connection Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.5.2 Piping Guidelines for Liebert MC and Fin/Tube Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.6 Vacuum and Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.6.1 Evacuation Air-Cooled Models—600mm (24") and 300mm (12")Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.7 Calculating Charging Values for Liebert MC Condenser Systems, Units without
Liebert Lee-Temp™ Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.8 Charging Fin/Tube Condenser with Variable Fan Speed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.0 WATER CONNECTIONS FOR WATER/GLYCOL UNITS—600MM (24") MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.1 Water Connections—Supply Humidifier and Drain Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.2 Glycol Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.3 Water Connections: Water/Glycol-Cooled Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3.1 Notes for Open-Circuit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3.2 Notes for Closed-Circuit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
i
8.0 WATER CONNECTIONS FOR CHILLED WATER UNITS—600MM (24") UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
9.0 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9.1 Electrical Field Connections Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9.1.1 Standard Electrical Connections—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9.1.2 Electrical Connections for Optional Features—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9.1.3 Standard Electrical Field Connections—300mm (12") DX Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
9.1.4 Electrical Field Connections for Optional Features—300mm (12") DX Models . . . . . . . . . . . 61
9.2 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.1 Power Supply Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.3 Protective Features of the Electronically Commutated Fans—All Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.4 Protective Features of Electrical Heaters—600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10.0 STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
10.1 Initial Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
10.2 Automatic Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
10.3 Chilled Water Valve: Chilled Water 600mm (24") Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.4 Adjust Baffles to Direct Air Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.4.1 Adjust Baffles on 600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.4.2 Adjust Baffles on 300mm (12") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.4.3 Adjust Blocker Plate—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11.0 LIEBERT ICOM® CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.1 Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11.1.1 Navigating Through the Liebert iCOM Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11.1.2 Accessing Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.1.3 Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
11.1.4 Viewing Multiple Units with a Networked Large Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.2 Liebert iCOM Display Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11.3 Liebert CRV Operation—Liebert iCOM Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
11.3.1 Entering a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.3.2 Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
11.3.3 Fan Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
11.3.4 Air Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
11.3.5 Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11.4 Liebert iCOM User Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.5 Liebert iCOM Service Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
11.6 Service-Standby Settings Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
11.7 Service—Wellness Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11.7.1 Calculating Unit Wellness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11.8 Service—Diagnostics Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11.9 Service—Set Alarms Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
11.10 Service—Sensor Calibration Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.11 Service—System/Network Unit-Level Setup Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
11.12 Service—Options Setup Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
11.13 Service—Remote Sensors Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.0 OPERATION IN TEAMWORK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12.1 Unit-to-Unit Network Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ii
12.2 Liebert iCOM U2U Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12.3 Wiring a Liebert iCOM U2U Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12.4 Teamwork Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12.4.1 Application of Teamwork Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.4.2 No Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.4.3 Teamwork Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
12.4.4 Teamwork Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
12.4.5 Teamwork Mode 3 (Optimized Aisle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
12.4.6 Standby-Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.0 REMOTE RACK SENSOR WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.1 DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.2 Set 2T Rack Sensor Identities-DIP Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13.3 Terminating the Last 2T Sensor on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.3.1 Using the Factory-Supplied Plug to Terminate the Last 2T Sensor on a Network . . . . . . . 142
13.3.2 Using Jumper to Terminate the Last 2T Rack Sensor on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.4 CANbus and Ethernet Cable Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.5 Route the CANbus Wire into the Cooling Unit-600mm (24") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.6 Route the CANbus Wire into the Cooling Unit-300mm (12") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.7 Sensor Location and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
13.8 Remote Rack Sensor Operation and Rack View Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
14.0 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
14.1 Alarms/Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
15.0 CALIBRATION AND REGULATION AFTER STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
15.1 Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
15.1.1 Determine Suction Superheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
15.1.2 Adjust Superheat Setting with the TEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
15.2 Environmental Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
15.3 Calibrating Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
16.0 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
16.1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
16.2 Facility Fluid and Piping Maintenance for Water and Glycol Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
16.3 Glycol Solution Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
16.4 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
16.5 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
16.6 Inspect and Replace the Air Filters—600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
16.7 Inspect and Replace the Air Filters—300mm (12") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.8 Condensate Drain and Condensate Pump Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16.8.1 Condensate Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16.8.2 Condensate Pump, Dual-Float. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16.9 Air-Cooled Condenser and Drycoolers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16.10 Electrical Heaters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16.11 Replace a Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.11.1 Fan Replacement on 600mm (24") Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.12 Considerations when Dismantling the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.13 F-Gas Regulation (EC) No. 842/2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
iii
17.0 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
APPENDIX A - HUMIDIFIER—600MM (24") UNITS ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
A.1 Principal of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
A.1.1 Humidifier Water Supply and PlumbingHumidifier Water Supply and Plumbing . . . . . . . 176
A.1.2 Humidifier Water ConnectionHumidifier Water Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
A.1.3 Humidifier Startup and OperationHumidifier Startup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.4 Low Water ConductivityLow Water Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.5 Cylinder ReplacementCylinder Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.6 Humidifier TroubleshootingHumidifier Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
APPENDIX B - REMOTE RACK SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
B.1 Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
FIGURES
Figure 1 Component location, common components—600mm (24") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 2 Component location—Liebert 300mm (12") CR019 DX units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 3 Overall dimensions, service area—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 4 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 5 Liebert CRV, front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 6 Liebert CRV center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 7 Recommended unit handling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 8 Moving the unit using rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 9 Unpacking the Liebert CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 10 Removing the 600mm (24") unit from the skid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 11 Removing the Liebert CRV 300mm (12") DX unit from the skid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 12 Adjust leveling feet—600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 13 General arrangement, Liebert MC condenser—air-cooled 600mm (24") units with and
without Liebert Lee-Temp condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 14 General arrangement, fin/tube condenser—air-cooled 600mm (24") units with and without
Liebert Lee-Temp condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 15 General arrangement, Liebert MC condenser with and without Liebert
Lee-Temp—air-cooled 300mm (12") units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 16 General arrangement—water-glycol units, 600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 17 General arrangement—chilled water, 600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 18 Condensate pumps—600mm (24") and 300mm (12") DX units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 19 Gravity drain piping—600mm (24") and 300mm (12") units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 20 Gravity drain connection, 300mm (12") DX units without condensate pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 21 Connections for vacuum creation and refrigerant charge—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 22 Connections for vacuum creation and refrigerant charge—300mm (12") DX models. . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 23 Top refrigerant piping connections—600mm (24") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 24 Bottom refrigerant piping connections—600mm (24") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 25 Top refrigerant piping connections—300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 26 Piping line cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 27 Connection locations—air-cooled 600mm (24") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 28 Connections—air-cooled 300mm (12") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 29 Water connection points, bottom entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 30 Recommended drycooler installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 31 Connections—water/glycol models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 32 Chilled water connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 33 Chilled water circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
iv
Figure 34 Connections—chilled water models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 35 Electrical field connections—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 36 CANbus communication connection Liebert CRV and Liebert MC (premium) unit. . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 37 Electrical field connections—300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 38 Low-voltage field wiring routing into the unit—300mm (12") DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 39 Serial tag location——600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 40 Remove electrical panel and lower front panel—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 41 Pull out the electric panel—300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 42 Power and control cable entry points and routing—600mm (24") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 43 Power cable routing—Bottom entry, 300mm (12") DX models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 44 Liebert IntelliSlot cable routing—Top entry, 300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 45 Liebert IntelliSlot cable routing—Bottom entry, 300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 46 Electrical heating with temperature sensor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 47 Refrigerant line components—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 48 Refrigerant line components—300mm (12") DX models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 49 Position of the chilled water valve actuator (for 2- or 3-way valve)—600mm (24") units. . . . . . . 76
Figure 50 Adjust the baffles to ensure correct airflow direction—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 51 Adjust the baffles to ensure correct airflow direction—300mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 52 Adjust air-blocking plate—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 53 Liebert iCOM® default screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 54 User menu icons and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 55 Service menu icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 56 System View screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 57 Unit View screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 58 Main screens, User, Service and Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 59 Screen transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 60 Menu tree—Stand-alone units or units not in a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 61 Liebert CRV system screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 62 Menu tree—Liebert CRV’s in a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 63 Display user menu - Display setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 64 Liebert iCOM menu components for Liebert CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 65 Liebert iCOM® menu components for Liebert CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 66 Service Menu - Setpoint screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 67 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 68 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Fan Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 69 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 70 Service menu setpoint screen for humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 71 User Menus-Setpoints parameters screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 72 User menus—Spare Parts screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 73 User menus-Event log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 74 User menus-Network screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 75 User menus-Sensor data parameters screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 76 User menus—Sensor data parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 77 User menus—Display setup parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 78 User menus—Total run hours parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 79 User menus—Condenser timer screen-page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 80 User menus—Condenser timer screen-page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 81 Service menus—Setpoints parameters screen - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
v
Figure 85 Service menus—Standby settings / lead-lag parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 86 Service menus—Wellness basic settings screen - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 87 Service menus—Wellness motor settings parameters screen - Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 88 Service menus—Wellness compressor 1 settings parameters screen - Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 89 Service menus—Wellness electric heater 1 settings parameters screen - Page 4. . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 90 Service menus—Wellness humidifier settings parameters screen - Page 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 91 Service menus—Diagnostics / service mode parameters screen - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 94 Service menus—Diagnostics / Service mode parameters - Page 4 CW models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 95 Service menus—Diagnostics / Service mode parameters - Page 4 DX models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 98 Service menus Figure 85 Diagnostics / service mode parameters screen - Page 7 . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 99 Service menus—Set alarms parameters screen - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 104 Service menusFigure 89 Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 105 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters — Page 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 106 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 107 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 108 Service menus—System / network setup parameters-System - Page 1 for the Display . . . . . . . 122
Figure 109 Service menus—System / network setup parameters-Large display only System - Page 2
for the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 110 Service menus—System/Network setup parameters Unit- Page 1 for the Board. . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 111 Service menus—System/Network setup parameters Unit - Page 2 for the Board . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 112 Service menus—Options setup parameters - Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 115 Service—Service Contact Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 116 Service menus—Remote Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 117 U2U Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 118 U2U network diagram-600mm (24in. ) Liebert CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 119 U2U network diagram-300mm (12in. ) Liebert CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 120 Teamwork modes and sensor management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 121 Teamwork Mode 1 with three cooling units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 122 2T rack sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 123 DIP switches in 2T sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 124 Setting DIP switches for 2T sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 125 Termination with factory-supplied plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 126 Termination jumper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 127 Removing the remote temperature/humidity sensor cover and setting DIP switches . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 128 CANbus wire Cable with Grounding Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 129 Route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-600mm (24") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 130 Top entry route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-300mm (12") DX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 131 2T rack sensors installed on neighboring racks-600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 132 2T rack sensors installed on neighboring racks-300mm (12") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 133 Remote Sensor Setup, page 1 of 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
vi
Figure 134 Temperature and humidity sensor terminal, viewed from the rear of the unit-600mm
(24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 135 Temperature and humidity sensor and filter clog sensor viewed from front of unit-300mm
(12") DX models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 136 Air filter location and input power safety switch—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 137 Remove the air filters—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 138 Differential pressure switch tubes—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 139 Remove the air filters 300mm (12") models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 140 Differential pressure switch components, 300mm (12") DX models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 141 Condensate pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 142 Liebert CRV fan assembly components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 143 General diagram—humidifier operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 144 Water connection to humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 145 Sensor pins, cylinder plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 146 CANbus and Ethernet cable wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
TABLES
Table 1 Dry weight, all model types, ± 5% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 2 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table 3 Center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 4 Weights without packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 5 Shipping weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 6 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 7 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions Liebert QuietLine™
sound levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 8 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 9 Condenser positioning—Liebert MC and fin/tube condenser with or without Liebert
Lee-Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 10 Liebert CRV position relative to the remote condenser—Liebert MC and fin/tube
condenser with or without Liebert Lee-Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 11 Recommended refrigerant line sizes, Cu, OD, for Liebert MC and VFD control fin/tube
condensers with R-410A with and without Liebert Lee-Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 12 Liebert MC Condenser piping sizes for 600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units. . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 13 Condenser piping connection sizes—single-circuit condensers with Liebert Lee-Temp
for 600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 14 Piping and refrigerant sizes for Liebert Lee-Temp™ fin/tube condensers with R-410A. . . . . . . . 37
Table 15 Piping and refrigerant sizes for Liebert air-cooled, VFD control condensers with
R-410A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 16 Unit connection sizes, air-cooled models—600mm (24") models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 17 Key to unit connections in Figure 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 18 Indoor unit charge R-410A refrigerant and oil charge for air-cooled models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 19 Interconnecting piping refrigerant charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 20 Refrigerant required, R-410A, approximate for Liebert MC Condensers, with and
without Liebert Lee-Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 21 Fin/tube condensers air-cooled condenser refrigerant charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 22 Refrigerant and oil charge for water-cooled models—600mm (24") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 23 Target subcooling for ambient outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 24 Difference in subcooling measurements—Indoor minus outdoor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 25 Liquid pressure and temperature chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 26 Water connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 27 Volume of CRV internal water circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 28 Glycol mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
vii
Table 29 Unit connections, water/glycol-cooled models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 30 Unit connections, chilled water models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table 31 Keyboard icons and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 32 Service menu icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 33 Controlling sensor settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 34 Service contact info parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 35 Teamwork Mode 1 or 3, definition of Serial, Parallel and Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 36 DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 37 Liebert CRV™ - Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Table 38 Calibrating electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 39 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 40 Unit diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Table 41 Liebert iCOM® medium control board DIPswitch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Table 42 Humidifier troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
viii
Important Safety Instructions
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This manual contains important safety instructions that should be followed during the installation
and maintenance of the Liebert CRV. Read this manual thoroughly before attempting to carry out
any operations on the Liebert CRV, including installation and operation. Retain this manual for the
entire service life of the Liebert CRV.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel should move, install or service this equipment.
Adhere to all warnings, cautions and installation, operating and safety instructions on the unit and in
this manual. Follow all operating and user instructions.
Any operation that requires opening doors or equipment panels must be carried out only by properly
trained and qualified personnel.
Each machine is equipped with an electric insulation device that allows the operator to work safely.
Switch Off the machine with this electric insulation device before beginning any maintenance
operation to eliminate remaining risks (electric shocks, burns, automatic restarting, moving parts
and remote control).
To identify the unit by model and serial number in order to obtain assistance or spare parts, locate
the identification label on the outside of the unit.
A warning label on the front and back panels reminds users that:
• the Liebert CRV restarts automatically
• the main switch must be opened before opening the internal compartments for any operation.
! WARNING
Arc flash and electric shock hazard. Can cause injury and death.
Open all local and remote electric power supplies, verify with a voltmeter that power is Off
and wear appropriate personal protective equipment per NFPA 70E before working within
the electric control enclosures.
Before proceeding with installation, read all instructions, verify that all the parts are included
and check the nameplate to be sure the voltage matches available utility power.
The Liebert iCOM® microprocessor does not isolate power from the unit, even in the Unit Off
mode.
Some internal components require and receive power even during the Unit Off mode of the
Liebert iCOM control.
The factory-supplied optional disconnect switch is inside the unit. The line side of this switch
contains live hazardous voltage potential.
Install and open a remote disconnect switch and verify with a voltmeter that live hazardous
voltage potential is not present inside the unit cabinet before working within. Refer to the
unit electrical schematic.
Follow all national and local codes.
1 Liebert® CRV™
! WARNING
Risk of high temperatures, extreme cold and high-speed rotating fan blades. Can cause
equipment damage, injury and death.
Disconnect all local and remote electrical power supplies, confirm that all fan blades have
stopped rotating and allow the component temperatures to become safe for human contact
before opening doors and/or removing protective covers and working within.
If the doors are opened immediately after the Liebert CRV has been switched Off:
• some components, such as electrical heaters, compressor, outlet area and outlet piping, may
remain at high temperature about 212°F (100°C);
• some components, such as the evaporator, may remain at low temperature;
• fan blades may continue to rotate by inertia.
These residual risks are highlighted by warning labels on the Liebert CRV.
! WARNING
Risk of explosive discharge from high-pressure refrigerant. Can cause injury and death.
This unit contains fluids and gases under high pressure. Relieve pressure before working with
piping.
! WARNING
Risk of hair, clothing and jewelry entanglement with high speed rotating fan blades. Can
cause equipment damage, serious injury or death.
Keep hair, jewelry and loose clothing secured and away from rotating fan blades during
operation.
! WARNING
Risk of top-heavy unit falling over. Can cause equipment damage, injury and death.
Verify that all lifting equipment is rated for the weight of the unit. See Tables 4 and 5 for
unit weights.
Read all of the following instructions before attempting to move, lift or remove packaging
from the Liebert CRV.
! CAUTION
Risk of sharp edges, splinters and exposed fasteners. Can cause injury.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel wearing appropriate safety headgear, gloves,
shoes and glasses should attempt to move, lift or remove packaging from the Liebert CRV or
prepare the unit for installation.
NOTICE
Risk of overhead interference. Can cause unit and/or building damage.
The unit may be too tall to fit through a doorway while on the skid. Measure the unit and
doorway heights and refer to the installation plans prior to moving the unit to verify
clearances.
NOTICE
Risk of improper storage. Can cause unit damage.
Keep the unit upright, indoors and protected from dampness, freezing temperatures and
contact damage.
Liebert® CRV™ 2
NOTICE
Risk of internal system corrosion and frozen coolant fluid. Can cause equipment damage and
major fluid leaks resulting in serious building damage, expensive repair costs and costly
system down time.
Cooling coils, heat exchangers and piping systems that are connected to open cooling towers
or other open water/glycol systems are at high risk of freezing and premature corrosion.
Fluids in these systems must contain the proper antifreeze and inhibitors to prevent freezing
and premature coil, piping and heat exchanger corrosion. The water or water/glycol solution
must be analyzed by a competent local water treatment specialist before startup to establish
the inhibitor and antifreeze solution requirement and at regularly scheduled intervals
throughout the life of the system to determine the pattern of inhibitor depletion.
The complexity of water/glycol solution condition problems and the variations of required
treatment programs make it extremely important to obtain the advice of a competent and
experienced water treatment specialist and follow a regularly scheduled coolant fluid system
maintenance program.
Read and follow individual unit installation instructions for precautions regarding fluid
system design, material selection and use of field-provided devices. Liebert systems contain
iron and copper alloys that require appropriate corrosion protection. It is important to have
the system running with flow through exchangers maintained at initial system fill for 24 to 48
hours depending on size and system configuration.
Water chemistry varies greatly by location, as do the required additives, called inhibitors,
that reduce the corrosive effect of the fluids on the piping systems and components. The
chemistry of the water used must be considered, because water from some sources may
contain corrosive elements that reduce the effectiveness of the inhibited formulation.
Sediment deposits prevent the formation of a protective oxide layer on the inside of the
coolant system components and piping. The water/coolant fluid must be treated and
circulating through the system continuously to prevent the buildup of sediment deposits and
or growth of sulfate reducing bacteria.
Proper inhibitor maintenance must be performed in order to prevent corrosion of the system.
Consult glycol manufacturer for testing and maintenance of inhibitors.
Commercial ethylene glycol (examples are Dow Chemical Dowtherm SR-1 Union Carbide
Ucartherm and Texaco E.G. Heat Transfer Fluid 100), when pure, is generally less corrosive
to the common metals of construction than water itself. It will, however, assume the
corrosivity of the water from which it is prepared and may become increasingly corrosive with
use if not properly inhibited.
NOTICE
Risk of no-flow condition. Can cause equipment damage.
Do not leave the unit in a no-flow condition. Idle fluid allows the collection of sediment that
prevents the formation of a protective oxide layer on the inside of tubes. Keep unit switched
on and system pump operating continuously.
NOTE
The Liebert indoor cooling unit has a factory-installed high pressure safety switch in the high
side refrigerant circuit. A pressure relief valve is provided with Liebert Lee-Temp™ condensers.
Consult your local building code to determine if the Liebert VFD condensers will require
field-provided pressure-relief devices. A fusible plug kit for Liebert VFD condensers is available
for field installation.
3 Liebert® CRV™
Model Number Nomenclature - 25 Digit Configuration Number 1
MODEL NUMBER NOMENCLATURE - 25 DIGIT CONFIGURATION NUMBER 1

Model # Part 1 Model Details Model # Part 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C R 0 2 0 R A 1 C 7 S D 1 8 1 1 E L 1 0 P A — — —
Digits 1-2 - Unit Family Digit 15 - Water/Glycol Valve Type
Liebert CRV = CR 1 = Two-Way Valve (W/G only) OR Default Air-Cooled Selection
Digits 3-5 - Nominal Capacity, kW 7 = Three-Way Valve (W/G only)
DX = 019 (300mm [12" wide]), 020, 035 (600mm [24"] wide),
2000mm [78.75in.] height) H = Default CW Selection
CW = 040 (600mm [24in.] wide, 2000mm height) Digit 16 - Unit Color

Digit 6 - Row-Based, Unit Depth 1 = Standard Color (Z-7021 Black)
R = 1100mm (43.4in) 2 = Non-Standard Color
2 = 1200mm (47.25 in) (available on 300mm [12in.] chilled water
models only) Digit 17 - High-Voltage Options
Digit 7 - System Type L = NO condensate pump (for units without humidifier), 5k SCCR CW
A = Air Cooled A = NO condensate pump (for units without humidifier)
W = Water/Glycol Cooled E = Dual-float condensate pump (for units with or without humidifier)
C = Chilled Water Cooled 5 = Dual-float condensate pump (for units with or without humidifier),
Digit 8 - Fan Type 5k SCCR CW
1 = Variable Speed EC fans M = NO dual-float condensate pump (for units without humidifier),
Digit 9 - Power Supply 65k SCCR, 600 series and CRV300 DX series
A = 460V / 3ph / 60Hz P = Dual-float condensate Pump (for units with or without humidifier),
C = 208V / 3ph / 60Hz 65k SCCR, 600 series and CRV300 DX series
P = 208/230V / 1ph / 60Hz (Control transformer can be tapped Digit 18 - Option Package (600 Series Only)
to provide 240V / 1ph / 60Hz) 0 = None
Y = 208/230 3ph 60Hz
Digit 10 - Cooling System H = Reheat and Humidifier Lockout
600mm (24in.) wide series: C = Reheat and Humidifier Lockout Additional Alarm Contact
2 = Two-Way Valve (CW, 600mm [24in.] models only) D = Low Sound Package (DX units only)
3 = Three-Way Valve (CW, 600mm [24in.] models only)
L = Low Sound Package and Reheat and Humidifier Lockout and
7 = R-410A digital scroll (DX only) Additional Alarm Contact (DX units only)
300mm (12in.) wide series
9 = Top and bottom CW connections; CRV600 only Digit 19 - Liebert IntelliSlot® Housing
Digit 11 - Humidifier 0 = No Cards
0 = None U = (1) Liebert IntelliSlot IS-UNITY-DP Card
S = Steam Generating Canister (600mm [24in.] models only) C = (1) Liebert SiteLink-E® Card
Digit 12 - Display Type 6 = (1) Liebert IntelliSlot IS-UNITY-DP Card and (1) Liebert
D = Liebert iCOM® Control with Large Graphic Display SiteLink-E® Card
Digit 13 - Reheat 7= (2) Liebert IntelliSlot IS-UNITY-DP Cards
0 = None Digit 20 - Future Options
1 = Electric Reheat (600mm [24in.] models only) 0 = None
Digit 14 - Air Filter Digit 21 - Packaging
8 = 4" MERV 8 + Clogged Filter Alarm (600mm [24in.] models only P = Domestic
9 = 4" MERV 11 + Clogged Filter Alarm (600mm [24in.] S = Export (Seaworthy)
models) only Digit 22 - Special Features
C = 1/2" MERV 1 and Clog Filter Alarm (300mm [12in.] A = No SFAs, Standard Unit
models only) X = SFA Included
A = 2" MERV 8 (300mm [12in.] DX models only) Digits 23-25 - Factory Configuration Number
1. The 14-digit model number consists of the first 10 digits and last four digits of the configuration number.
2. CR019 data in this document refers only as DX units.
Liebert® CRV™ 4
Liebert CRV Component Location
1.0 LIEBERT CRV COMPONENT LOCATION
Figure 1 Component location, common components—600mm (24") models
4
3 1 Top electrical entrance
2 Electric box
Top humidifier water supply,
2 3
condensate pump drain
1
4 Supply and Return Connections
5 EC plug fans
6 Electric heaters
7 Humidifier distributor
13 5
8 Condensate pump
9 Bottom electrical entrance
10 Bottom condensate pump drain
12 11 Evaporator / CW coil
12 Liebert iCOM®
13 Serial tag (inside door)
6
11 7
REAR
10
FRONT
5 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 2 Component location—Liebert 300mm (12") CR019 DX units
1 Top electrical entrance

FRONT
1 2
2 Liebert iCOM®
3 Evaporator Coil
4 Bottom Refrigerant Connections
Knockouts for bottom electrical
5
10 entrance
6 Compressor
7 Caster and leveling foot
9
8 Serial Tag
9 Electric box
10 Main disconnect switch
11 Baffles (five assemblies)
12 EC plug fans (five)
13 Top Refrigerant Connections
13 REAR
8 12
11
4 3
5
REAR
6
FRONT
Liebert® CRV™ 6
Figure 3 Overall dimensions, service area—600mm (24") models

Access required to service the
Liebert CRV within the row.
Rear service area is S+B or S+A
when B is not available.
25-9/16" 35-9/16"
(650mm) (903mm)
13-3/4"
(350mm) A Nominal
78-3/4" REAR
(2000mm)
25-9/16"
B S
(650mm) FRONT
3-15/16"
(100mm)
Door 12"
107-5/16" Fully (305mm)
(2725mm) Open
2 )
(60 3-5/8 m) mm
0m " ( 7 5m 1175
3" (
46-1/4" m) 4"
-1/
(1175mm)
TOP VIEW 46
For proper airflow distribution:

Align the front door of neighboring
server racks with the front corner
of the Liebert CRV
21-5/8"
(550mm) S
3-5/16" 23-5/8"
(100mm) (600mm)
27-9/16"
(700mm) Air Filters
Access required for installation of

the Liebert CRV within the row.
ir
Ho
tA REAR VIEW
l
tal )
Ins 45
mm
2
" (1
ir 49
ld A
Co
l
tal
Ins mm
)
Front or Rear
2 45
" (1 Clearance Required
49 DPN001791
Rev. 3
Table 1 Dry weight, all model types, ± 5%
Model Type
Air Cooled Water/Glycol Chilled Water
Model No. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)
CR020R 739 (335) 772 (350 —
CR035R 805 (365) 849 (385) —
CR040R — — 728 (330)
Source: DPN001791, Rev. 2
7 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 4 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") DX models
Access Required to Service the Unit

Between Existing Racks Within the Row
Service area is S+A+B
12" 12" 12"
(300mm) (300mm) (300mm)
A S B FRONT HOT AIR
36"
(915mm)
79"
(2000mm)
COLD AIR
REAR
TOP VIEW
Depth
(see table)
12"
(300mm)
FRONT
with Display Access Required to Install the Unit
Between Existing Racks Within the Row.
36"
(915mm)
B S A Either Front
or Rear
Clearance
12" 12" 12" Required
(300mm) (300mm) (300mm)
Install
Depth
DPN002807 Install
Rev. 1 Depth
Table 2 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") models

Height Depth Installation Weight, ± 5%
Model in (mm) in (mm) Depth, in (mm) lb (kg)
CR019R 78.7 (2,000) 43.3 (1,100) 49.2 (1,250) 507 (230)
Liebert® CRV™ 8
Introduction
2.0 INTRODUCTION
2.1 Product Description

The Liebert CRV is a precision cooling unit available in compressorized (air-, water- or glycol-cooled)
and chilled water configurations to be installed within a row of high-density computing racks in a
“hot aisle-cold aisle” configuration.
Air enters the rear of the Liebert CRV from the hot aisle, is filtered, cooled and conditioned, then
discharged into the cold aisle. The Liebert CRV provides all the necessary functions of a standard
precision air conditioner, including cooling, heating, humidification, dehumidification, air filtration,
condensate management, temperature control, alarm monitoring and data communication. The
Liebert CRV is optimized for maximum cooling capacity in a minimal footprint.
Figure 5 Liebert CRV, front and rear views
Front Rear Front Rear

600mm (24 inch) DX and CW Models 300mm (12 inch) DX Models
9 Liebert® CRV™
Introduction
2.1.1 SmartAisle™ Configuration

The SmartAisle from Emerson Network Power® is an intelligent row-based system that integrates
data center racks, power, row cooling, aisle containment, monitoring and control technologies into a
complete data center layout.
The Liebert CRV is a SmartAisle technology, appropriate for use with the SmartAisle design
approach.
Typical SmartAisle Components

Each SmartAisle from Emerson is custom-designed, offering the most favorable layout for the
installation. The design takes into account the equipment required, equipment sizes (with the heat
load or power consumption), cooling equipment type (chilled water or water/glycol based) and whether
cooling or power redundancy is desired.
Some typical components are:
Liebert APM™ DCF™ or DCM™ Cabinets
Liebert Battery Cabinets Modular Containment
™
Liebert BDC Liebert MB™
Liebert CRV Liebert PDU’s
Depending on heat load and power requirements, there may be multiple Liebert cooling units and
multiple AC Power Protection and Distribution units.
Liebert® CRV™ 10
Inspection and Unpacking
3.0 INSPECTION AND UNPACKING
! WARNING
! CAUTION
NOTICE
Risk of overhead interference. Can cause unit and/or building damage.
The unit may be too tall to fit through a doorway while on the skid. Measure the unit and
doorway heights and refer to the installation plans prior to moving the unit to verify
clearances.
NOTICE
Risk of improper storage. Can cause unit damage.
Keep the unit upright, indoors and protected from dampness, freezing temperatures and
contact damage.
3.1 Equipment Inspection

After the Liebert CRV unit arrives and before it is unpacked, verify that the delivered equipment
matches the bill of lading. Examine the packaging for any signs of mishandling or damage. Inspect all
items for damage, visible or concealed. Report any damage immediately to the carrier and file a
damage claim. Send a copy of the claim to Emerson Network Power or your Emerson representative.
3.1.1 Packing Material

All material used to package this unit is recyclable. Please save this material for future
use or dispose of it appropriately. R
11 Liebert® CRV™
3.2 Handling
Figure 6 Liebert CRV center of gravity
Z Z
X X
Y Y
• Always keep the packaged Liebert CRV upright and never leave it outdoors.
Be aware of the center of gravity indicated on the package and in Table 3 below:
Table 3 Center of gravity
Distance from lower right front corner, ± 2 in. (51m)
Unit
Model No. /Cooling Type Width X, in. (mm) Y, in. (mm) Z, in. (mm)
CR019 (DX) 300mm (12") 21 (154) 6 (154) 34 (860)
CR020
600mm (24") 20 (508) 12 (305) 28 (711)
(air-cooled or water-glycol)
CR035
600mm (24") 20 (508) 12 (305) 32 (813)
(air-cooled or water-glycol)
CR040
600mm (24") 21 (533) 12 (305) 32 (813)
(chilled water)
The center of gravity on the Liebert CRV varies with the options and the model's size.
Table 4 Weights without packaging

Weight ± 5%, lb (kg)
Model Electrical
No. Data Air-Cooled Water/Glycol-Cooled Chilled Water
CR019 208/3/60 507 (230) — —
CR020 208/3/60 739 (335) — —
460/3/60 739 (335) 772 (350) —
CR020
208/3/60 739 (335) 772 (350) —
460/3/60 805 (365) 849 (385) —
CR035
208/3/60 805 (365) 849 (385) —
460/3/60 — — 728 (330)
CR040
208/3/60 — — 728 (330)
Liebert® CRV™ 12
Table 5 Shipping weights

Domestic Packaging, lb (kg) Export Packaging, lb (kg)
Model
No. Air Water/Glycol Chilled Water Air Water/Glycol Chilled Water
CR019 598 (271) — — 721 (327) — —
CR020 846 (384) 879 (399) — 953 (432) 986 (447) —
CR035 912 (414) 956 (434) — 1019 (462) 1063 (482) —
CR040 — — 835 (379) — — 942 (427)
3.2.1 Handling the Unit While it is Packaged

Figure 7 Recommended unit handling equipment
Spreader Bars
Forklift and Slings
Pallet Jack
• Transport the packaged unit using a forklift, pallet jack or by overhead lift with slings and
spreader bars that are rated for the weight of the unit (see tables above).
• When using a forklift or pallet jack, make sure the forks (if adjustable) are spread to the widest
allowable distance to still fit under the skid. Make sure the fork length is suitable for the skid
length. Skid length for 600mm (24") model is 60" (1524mm). Skid length for 300mm (12") model is
54" (1372mm)
• Do not lift the packaged unit any higher than 4" (102mm). All personnel except those moving the
Liebert CRV must be kept 12' (3.7m) or more from the unit while it is being moved.
• If the unit must be lifted higher than 4" (102mm), all personnel not directly involved in moving
the Liebert CRV must be 20' (5m) or more from the unit.
13 Liebert® CRV™
3.3 Moving the Unit Using Rigging—600mm (24") Models
! WARNING
Verify that all lifting equipment is rated for the weight of the unit. See Tables 4 and 5 for
unit weights.
! CAUTION
1. Use a pallet jack or forklift to raise the packaged unit.
2. Place slings under the skid runners, equally spacing the slings to make sure the unit is balanced
(see Figure 8).
3. Lower the unit and remove the pallet jack or forklift.
4. Connect the slings to the lifting device, using spreader bars or similar equipment to protect the
unit (see Figure 8).
NOTE
Wrapping one or two more straps around the middle of the Liebert CRV will improve stability
when it is lifted.
5. Move the unit to its installation location. Two or more properly trained and qualified personnel
are required to move the Liebert CRV to its installation location.
6. Lower the Liebert CRV and remove the slings.
Figure 8 Moving the unit using rigging
197023
Rev. 5
Liebert® CRV™ 14
3.4 Unpacking the Liebert CRV—600mm (24") Models

1. Remove the lag bolts securing ramp to skid.
2. Place the ramp and the plastic bag with orange clips to the side for use in removing the unit from
the skid.
3. Remove the stretch film and corner/side packaging planks from around the unit.
4. Remove the unit bag when ready to install the unit.
Figure 9 Unpacking the Liebert CRV
197023
Rev. 5
15 Liebert® CRV™
3.5 Removing the Unit from the Skid
! WARNING
! CAUTION
1. Open the top panel door with the mounted control (refer to Figure 10).
2. Remove the bottom baffle panel assembly by removing the screws with a T30 Torx screwdriver.
3. Set the baffle panel assembly aside until the Liebert CRV is ready for it to be to reattached.
4. Close and latch the top panel door.
5. Place the ramp against the skid as shown in Figure 10.
6. Remove the orange clips from the plastic bag.
7. Insert clips into holes of the skid and ramp.
8. Remove the eight bolts (four on each side) that secure side tie-down brackets to skid.
Bolts can be removed using a 17mm socket wrench, open-end wrench or pliers.
9. Lower the four stabilizer feet until the side tie-down brackets no longer contact the skid.
10. Remove the six bolts (three on each side) that secure the side tie-down brackets to the unit base.
The bolts can be removed using a 13mm socket wrench, open-end wrench or pliers.
11. Remove the side tie-down brackets.
12. Remove the eight bolts (four on each side) that secure the lift block to the skid.
The bolts can be removed using a 17mm socket wrench, open-end wrench or pliers.
13. Remove the lift blocks from the skid.
14. Using the stabilizer feet, lower the unit to the skid.
15. Move the unit to its installation location. Two or more properly trained and qualified personnel
are required to move the Liebert CRV to its installation location.
Liebert® CRV™ 16
Figure 10 Removing the 600mm (24") unit from the skid
Step 5 Step 8
Step 1
4 Bolts on Each Side

Secure the Tie-Down
Bracket to the Skid
M17 Socket
M13 Socket
Step 8
Step 15
197023
Rev. 5
3.6 Reattaching the Baffle Panel—600mm (24") Units

Once the Liebert CRV has been moved to where it will be installed, the baffle panel can be reattached.
1. Open top panel door (the one with the Liebert iCOM®).
2. Reattach the bottom baffle panel assembly with screws, using a T30 Torx drive.
3. Close and latch top panel door.
17 Liebert® CRV™
3.7 Uncrating and Removing the Liebert CRV from the Skid—300mm (12") DX Units
If possible, transport the unit using a forklift or pallet jack.
• If using a forklift or pallet jack, ensure that the fork tine length is suitable to safely move the
packaged unit.
• Emerson recommends keeping the unit on the shipping pallet and in its protective packaging
until it has been moved to its installation site.
• When handling and unpacking the unit, exercise great care to prevent damage.
• Do not lift the unit any higher than 6" (152mm) while moving it. If it must be lifted higher than
6" (152mm), exercise great care and keep all personnel who are not helping move the unit at least
20' (5m) away from the unit.
• The Liebert CRV 300mm (12") DX unit has four casters to permit rolling it into position. The unit
also has four outrigger-style stabilizer bars to help keep it from tipping.
! WARNING
Risk of unsecured unit rolling off skid. Can cause equipment damage, injury or death.
The Liebert CRV 300mm (12") DX unit is on casters. Ensure that the unit/skid is located on a
flat surface before loosening the hardware securing the Liebert CRV to its shipping pallet.
1. Release the retaining clips along the seam in the corrugated packaging from around the unit. This
will allow removing the corrugated packaging (see Steps 1 and 2 in Figure 11).
2. Remove the two ramps, each is secured to the skid with two bolts with 1/4" hexagonal heads.
3. Fit the tab on each ramp into a hole on the shipping pallet as shown in (see the detail area in
Step 3 in Figure 11).
4. Remove the two shipping brackets, one on each side of the Liebert CRV. Each bracket is secured
by three bolts with a 9/16" hexagonal heads (see Step 4 in Figure 11).
At least two properly trained and qualified personnel may roll the Liebert CRV down the ramp and off
the pallet onto a flat surface.
Figure 11 Removing the Liebert CRV 300mm (12") DX unit from the skid
1 2
Retaining Clip
3
4
9/16" Hex Head

1/4" Hex Head
2 Per Ramp
3 Per Bracket
5
315639P
Liebert® CRV™ 18
Preparing the Liebert CRV for Installation
4.0 PREPARING THE LIEBERT CRV FOR INSTALLATION

1. Open the display door and remove the lower front baffle panel using a 10mm nutdriver or T30
Torx Bit to prepare for installation.
2. Open the rear panel, referring to Figure 10. The documents are located inside the display door.
3. After the Liebert CRV is in its final installation position, adjust the four base supports, or feet,
with an adjustable wrench. Ensure that the unit is level to avoid corrosion or health hazards
caused by condensate accumulation.
a. Turning the base supports, or feet, clockwise, will extend them, lifting the unit one corner at a
time.
b. Tighten the nut on the top of each adjustable foot to lock the feet. The nut on 600mm (24in.)
units is inside the cabinet. The nut on 300mm (24in.) units is under the cabinet.
Figure 12 Adjust leveling feet—600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units

Tighten this nut after
the foot is adjusted to
the desired height
Adjust the height

of each foot
600mm (24in.) Unit
300mm (12in.) Unit
Adjust the height of

the feet by turning
these with a wrench
Tighten this jam nut against the

cabinet floor after the foot is
adjusted to the desired height.
19 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
5.0 PIPING
All fluid and refrigeration connections to the unit, with the exception of the condensate drain, are
sweat copper. Factory-installed piping brackets must not be removed. Field-installed piping must be
installed in accordance with local codes and must be properly assembled, supported, isolated and
insulated. Avoid piping runs through noise-sensitive areas, such as office walls and conference rooms.
Refer to specific text and detailed diagrams in this manual for other unit-specific piping
requirements.
All piping below the elevated floor must be arranged so that it offers the least resistance to airflow.
Careful planning of the piping layout under the raised floor is required to prevent the airflow from
being blocked. When installing piping on the subfloor, Emerson recommends installing the pipes in a
horizontal plane rather than stacked one above the other. Whenever possible, the pipes should be run
parallel to the airflow.
5.1 Fluid Connections
NOTICE
Risk of water leakage. Can cause severe property damage and loss of critical data center
equipment.
The Liebert CRV requires a water drain connection. The 600mm (24") model may require an
external water supply to operate the humidifier. Improper installation, application and
service practices can result in water leakage from the unit.
Do not locate the Liebert CRV directly above any equipment that could sustain water damage.
Emerson recommends installing monitored leak detection equipment for the water supply
lines and the internal unit waterlines.
Liebert® CRV™ 20
Piping
5.2 Refrigeration and Hydraulic Circuits

Figure 13 General arrangement, Liebert MC condenser—air-cooled 600mm (24") units with and without
Liebert Lee-Temp condenser
Liebert MC Condenser Liebert MC Condenser
With Liebert Lee-Temp Receiver
Optional
Field Head Pressure Relief Valve
Pressure Service
Installed Pressure Control Valve Check Valve
Transducer Valve
Fusible Transducer
Plug
Liquid Liquid Liebert Lee-Temp Receiver
Condenser Coil Condenser Coil
Liquid Return
Hot Gas
Discharge Hot Gas Discharge
Liebert CRV Unit and Associated Piping

Solenoid Expansion
Filter Sight Valve
Drier Glass Valve Distributor
Evaporator Coil
Sensing
External Equalizer Bulb
CR020 Digital * For rises over
Service Valve Solenoid Valve 25ft (7.6m), trap
every 20ft (6m)
High-Pressure
or evenly divided.
Transducer Vibration Absorber
High
Pressure Suction Line
Cut Out
CR035 Digital Digital Low Pressure Transducer

Solenoid Scroll
Valve Service Valve
Compressor
*Isolation
Valve
Hot Gas Discharge Vibration Absorber Check Valve
Isolation Valve *Isolation Valve

Liquid Return
Factory Refrigerant Piping

Field Piping
Service / Schrader (Access) Connection No Valve Core
Service / Schrader (Access) Connection With Valve Core
NOTES:
1. Schematic representation shown. Do not use for specific connection locations.
2. One or more additional pressure relief valves are required downstream of any DPN002858
and all field-installed isolation. Do not isolate any refrigerant circuits from Rev. 0
overpressurization protection.
21 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
Figure 14 General arrangement, fin/tube condenser—air-cooled 600mm (24") units with and without
Liebert Lee-Temp condenser
Outdoor Lee-Temp Condenser

Outdoor VFD Condenser
Head Pressure
Optional Field-Installed Relief Valve
Control Valve
Fusible Plug Check Valve
+
+
Condenser Coil VFD Transducer Condenser Coil
Lee-Temp Receiver
(VFD) (Liebert Lee-Temp) Liquid
+ + Return
Hot Gas Discharge
Hot Gas Discharge
LIEBERT CRV AND ASSOCIATED PIPING

Filter Sight Solenoid Expansion
Drier Glass Valve Valve Distributor
Evaporator Coil
Sensing
External Equalizer Bulb
CR020 Digital
Service Valve Solenoid Valve * Traps Every
High-Pressure 15ft. (4.6m)
Transducer Vibration of Rise
Absorber
High-
Pressure
Suction Line
Cut Out
Low-Pressure Transducer
CR035 Digital
Solenoid Valve Service Valve
Digital Scroll
Compressor
*Isolation Valve
Hot Gas Discharge Vibration Absorber Check Valve
*Isolation Valve
Liquid Return
Factory Refrigerant Piping * Components are not supplied by

Field Piping Liebert but are recommended for
proper circuit operation and
maintenance. Should be located
Service / Schrader (Access) Connection With Valve Core near the indoor Liebert CRV unit.
1. Schematic representation shown. Do not use for specific connection locations. + Inverted Trap on Discharge and
2. One or more additional pressure relief valves are required downstream of any Liquid Lines to extend above the
and all field-installed isolation. Do not isolate any refrigerant circuits from base of the coil by a minimum of
overpressurization protection. 7-1/2" (190mm).
DPN001984
Rev. 4
Liebert® CRV™ 22
Piping
Figure 15 General arrangement, Liebert MC condenser with and without Liebert Lee-Temp—air-cooled
300mm (12") units
Liebert MC Condenser Liebert MC Condenser

With Liebert Lee-Temp Receiver
Optional
Field- Head Pressure Relief Valve
Pressure Check
Installed Pressure Control Valve Service
Transducer Valve
Fusible Transducer Valve
Plug
Liquid Liquid Liebert Lee-Temp
Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Receiver
Liquid Return
Hot Gas
Discharge Hot Gas Discharge
LIEBERT CRV UNIT AND ASSOCIATED PIPING

Solenoid Expansion
Filter Sight
Valve Valve
Drier Glass Distributor
Sensing Evaporator Coil

Bulb * For rises over
External 25ft. (7.6m), trap
Equalizer every 20ft (6m)
or at evenly
High-Pressure Digital Solenoid Low Pressure divided
Transducer Valve Transducer distances
Suction
Line
Digital Scroll
Compressor
*Isolation
Hot Gas Discharge Check Valve Valve
*Isolation Valve
Liquid Return
Factory Refrigerant Piping * Components are not supplied by

Field Piping Emerson, but are recommended for
Service / Schrader (Access) Connection With Valve Core proper circuit operation and
maintenance. Isolation valves
NOTES: should be located near the indoor
1. Schematic representation shown. Do not use for specific connection locations. Liebert CRV unit.
2. One or more additional pressure relief valves are required downstream of any
and all field-installed isolation. Do not isolate any refrigerant circuits from
overpressurization protection. DPN002808
3. Refer to outdoor condenser documents above for proper trap placement. Rev. 1
23 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
Figure 16 General arrangement—water-glycol units, 600mm (24") models
Distributor
Vibration Evaporator Coil

Absorber Sensing
Bulb
CR020 Digital Rotalock Valve
Solenoid Valve
CR035 Digital High-
Solenoid Valve Pressure
Transducer External Equalizer
Low Pressure
Transducer Digital High-Pressure Switch
Scroll
Rotalock Valve Compressor Expansion
Valve
Vibration
Absorber
Check Differential
Check Valve
Valve Check Valve
Water/Glycol Return 3-Way Valve (145psi)
Solenoid
Top Connection Configuration Filter Valve
Drier
AB Relief
A
Water Valve
B Cooled
Brazed
Water/Glycol Return Plate
Bottom Connection Condenser 2-Way Valve
Receiver Configuration
Water/Glycol Supply AB A
Top Connection
B
Blocker
Disk
Valve
Fitting
Water/Glycol Supply
Bottom Connection Factory Refrigerant Piping
NOTES Service / Schrader (Access) Connection With Valve Core
1. Schematic representation shown. Do not use for specific connection locations.
2. Install a 35 mesh strainer, in an easily accessible location, on the water/glycol
supply to prevent particles from entering the heat exchanger. Strainer bypass DPN001985
valves are reccomended to allow the strainer to be cleaned while maintaining Rev. 1
flow to the cooling unit.
Liebert® CRV™ 24
Piping
Figure 17 General arrangement—chilled water, 600mm (24") models
NOTE: Schematic representation shown.

Chilled Do not use for specific connection locations.
Water
Air Bleed Valve Coil
A A
B
AB 3-Way Motorized Ball OR AB 2-Way Motorized Ball

Valve Configuration Valve Configuration
Plug Pipe
Chilled Water Return
(Top of Unit Connection)
Plug Pipe
Chilled Water Return
(Bottom of Unit Connection)
Plug Pipe
Chilled Water Supply
(Top of Unit Connection)
Factory Refrigerant Piping

Plug Pipe
Chilled Water Supply DPN001986
(Bottom of Unit Connection) Rev. 2
25 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
5.2.1 Condensate Drain Piping—Field-Installed

The pump is field-connected for either top or bottom discharge.
• Top condensate discharge: Connect the factory-provided pump discharge hose to the provided
connection for top discharge.
• Bottom condensate discharge: Route the factory-supplied discharge hose through the
knockout in the base ofthe unit for connection to a field-provided drain.
NOTICE
Risk of improper field installed drain piping. Overflowing drain water can cause equipment
and building damage.
The drain line has an internal trap and must not be trapped outside the unit or water may
back up into the drain pan and overflow the unit cabinet.
• The drain line’s inside diameter must be the same as or larger than the factory-provided drain
connection’s ID
• Do not expose drain line to freezing temperatures
• Drain line may contain boiling water. Use copper or other suitable material
• Drain line must comply with local building codes
• Emerson recommends installing monitored under-floor leak detection equipment
Condensate Pump—600mm (24") Models

• 1/2" copper sweat connection is provided on units with optional factory-installed condensate
pump
• Condensate pump is rated for approximately 6GPM at 30 ft (22.7 l/m at 9m) total head
• Size piping based on available condensate head
Condensate Pump—300mm (12") DX Models

• 1/2" copper connection is provided on units with optional factory-installed condensate pump
• 208V condensate pump rated for 0.77GPM at 13 ft. (2.8l/m at 3.9m) of total head pressure
• 230V condensate pump rated for 0.92GPM at 13 ft. (3.3l/m at 3.9m) of total head pressure
• Size piping based on available condensate head—22ft. (6.7m)
Figure 18 Condensate pumps—600mm (24") and 300mm (12") DX units
Condensate
Pump
600mm (24") Models

300mm (12") Models
Liebert® CRV™ 26
Piping
5.2.2 Gravity Drain—Units Without Factory-Installed Condensate Pump—600mm (24") Models

• 3/4" FPT drain connection is provided on units without optional factory-installed condensate
pump with infrared humidifier or no humidifier; 1-1/4" FPT connection is provided on units with
steam generating humidifier
• Pitch the drain line toward the drain a minimum of 1/8" (3mm) per 1 foot (305mm) of length
• Drain is trapped internally. Do not trap the drain external to equipment
• Drain line must be sized for 2 gpm (7.6 l/m) flow
Figure 19 Gravity drain piping—600mm (24") and 300mm (12") units

Internal
Drain
UNIT
External
Drain
Continuous Downward Slope
CORRECT
Internal Internal
UNIT Drain UNIT Drain
External
External Drain
Do Not Externally Drain These are external traps also, although
Trap the Unit unintentional. Lines must be rigid enough
not to bow over top of other objects.
INCORRECT DPN001556
INCORRECT Rev. 0
27 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
5.2.3 Gravity Drain—300mm (12") DX Units Without Factory-Installed Condensate Pump

• 3/4" FPT drain connection is provided on units without optional factory-installed condensate
pump; the drain line’s inside diameter must be the same as or larger than the factory-provided
drain connection’s inside diameter
• Pitch the drain line toward the drain a minimum of 1/8" (3mm) per 1 foot (305mm) of length
• Drain is trapped internally. Do not trap the drain external to equipment
• Drain line must be sized for 2 gpm (7.6 l/m) flow
NOTICE
Risk of improper field installed drain piping. Overflowing drain water can cause equipment
and building damage.
The drain line has an internal trap and must not be trapped outside the unit or water may
back up into the drain pan and overflow the unit cabinet.
Figure 20 Gravity drain connection, 300mm (12") DX units without condensate pump
When coolant supply and

return pipes enter through
the top of the Liebert CRV
300mm (12"), remove this
plate and remove knockout Adapter, 1"NPT
for gravity drain. Male -3/4" Barb
315005
Front of Unit Pg. 1, Rev. 3
Front Door and Fans Removed
5.2.4 Humidifier Supply Water—Optional Steam Generating Canister—600mm (24") Models

• 1/4" supply line; maximum water pressure is 145psi (1000kPa)
• Fill valve is sized for pressure range of 30 to 120psi (207-827kPa)
• Do not supply steam generating humidifier with softened water
• Do not use hot water source
• Water conductivity must be in the range of 330-670 micro-siemens
5.2.5 Requirements of Systems Using Water or Glycol—600mm (24") Models

These guidelines apply to the field leak checking and fluid requirements for field piping systems,
including Liebert chilled water, condenser (water or glycol) and drycooler circuits.
Liebert® CRV™ 28
Piping
General Guidelines
• Equipment damage and personal injury can result from improper piping installation, leak
checking, fluid chemistry and fluid maintenance.
• Follow local piping codes, safety codes.
• Qualified personnel must install and inspect system piping.
• Contact a local water consultant regarding water quality, corrosion protection and freeze
protection requirements.
• Install manual shutoff valves at the supply and return line to each indoor unit and drycooler to
permit routine service and emergency isolation of the unit.
NOTICE
system down time.
NOTICE
Risk of no-flow condition. Can cause equipment damage.
Do not leave the unit in a no-flow condition. Idle fluid allows the collection of sediment that
prevents the formation of a protective oxide layer on the inside of tubes. Keep unit switched
on and system pump operating continuously.
29 Liebert® CRV™
Piping
Leak Checking of Unit and Field Piping

Liebert unit fluid systems are factory-checked for leaks and may be shipped with a nitrogen holding
charge. Liebert unit fluid circuits should be checked for leaks at installation as described below.
NOTE
During leak checking of field-installed piping, Emerson recommends that the unit be isolated
using field-installed shutoff valves. When the Liebert units are included in a leak test, use of
fluid for pressure testing is recommended. When pressurized gas is used for leak testing the
Liebert unit, the maximum recommended pressure is 30 psig (2 bars) and tightness of the unit
should be verified by pressure decay over time, (<2 psig/hour [0.3 bars/hour]) or sensing a
tracer gas with suitable instrumentation. Dry seals in fluid valves and pumps may not hold a
high gas pressure.
Liebert® CRV™ 30
Refrigerant Connections for Air-Cooled Units
6.0 REFRIGERANT CONNECTIONS FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS
! WARNING
Risk of explosive discharge from high-pressure refrigerant. Can cause injury or death.
This unit contains fluids and/or gases under high pressure.
Relieve pressure before working with piping.
NOTICE
Risk of oil contamination with water. Can cause equipment damage.
The piping must not be open to the atmosphere for extended periods because the Liebert CRV
requires POE (polyol ester) oil. POE oil absorbs water at a much faster rate when exposed to
air than previously used oils. Because water is the enemy of a reliable refrigeration system,
extreme care must be used when opening systems during installation or service. If water is
absorbed into the POE oil, it will not be easily removed and will not be removed through the
normal evacuation process. If the oil is too wet, it may require an oil change. POE oils also
have a property that makes them act as a solvent in a refrigeration system. Maintaining
system cleanliness is extremely important because the oil will tend to bring any foreign
matter back to the compressor.
The Liebert CRV can be connected to a condenser through either the top or bottom of the unit. The
unit is piped for connections at the top of the unit as shown in Figure 23, with provision for
connection through the bottom of the unit.
Connecting through the bottom of the unit requires cutting the liquid and suction lines as shown in
Figure 24. Cutting these lines disconnects the top connections from the rest of the refrigeration system.
Air-cooled units are shipped with a holding charge of nitrogen.
6.1 Piping Guidelines—Air-Cooled Units

• Indoor unit ships with a nitrogen holding charge; do not vent the evaporator until all refrigerant
piping is in place, ready for connection to the unit and condenser
• Use copper piping with high temperature brazed joints
• Isolate piping from building using vibration-isolating supports
• Refer to Tables 14 through 11 for piping sizes
• Refer to condenser installation manual for charging information
• Install traps on hot gas (discharge) lines at the base of vertical risers and every 15 feet (4.6m) of
vertical rise.
• See Table 10 for the allowable elevation difference between the condenser and the Liebert CRV.
• Consult factory if piping run exceeds 300 feet (91m) equivalent length
• Keep piping clean and dry, especially on units with R-410A refrigerant
• Avoid piping runs through noise-sensitive areas
• Do not run piping directly in front of airstream of any air conditioner
• Refrigerant oil – do not mix oil types
Refer to ASHRAE Refrigeration Handbook for general, good-practice refrigeration piping.
31 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 21 Connections for vacuum creation and refrigerant charge—600mm (24") models
Suction and Supply Line Connections

Liquid Line Connection
High-Pressure Switch
Pressure
Transducer
Figure 22 Connections for vacuum creation and refrigerant charge—300mm (12") DX models
Service Connections
for vacuum and charging
Liebert® CRV™ 32
6.2 Refrigerant Piping—Air-Cooled Models

Figure 23 Top refrigerant piping connections—600mm (24") models
Figure 24 Bottom refrigerant piping connections—600mm (24") models
If using bottom
connections, cut
the pipes just
below the black
pipe clamps
Figure 25 Top refrigerant piping connections—300mm (12") DX models
Rear Front
Return Supply
Refrigerant Connections—300mm (12") Air-Cooled Models

For refrigerant piping locations, refer to Figure 28.
33 Liebert® CRV™
6.3 Liebert MC Condenser Selection—600mm (24") and 300mm (12")CRV Units

Table 6 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions
Outdoor Design Ambient Temperature, °F (°C)
Indoor Unit
Model Width 95 (35) 100 (38) 105 (41) 110 (43) 115 (46) 120 (49)
300mm
CR019R* (12") MCS028E1 MCM040E1 MCM040E1 MCM040E1 MCL055E1 MCL055E1
CR020A 600mm
CR035A (24") MCM040E1 MCL055E1 MCL055E1 MCM080E1 MCM080E1 MCM080E1
* 300mm (12") DX model
Table 7 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions Liebert QuietLine™ sound
levels
Outdoor Design Ambient Temperature, °F (°C)
Indoor Unit
Model Width 95 (35) 100 (38) 105 (41) 110 (43) 115 (46) 120 (49)
300mm
CR019R* (12") —
MCS028E1 MCM040E1 MCL055E1 MCL055E1 MCM080E1
CR020A 600mm —
CR035A (24") MCL055E1 MCL055E1 MCM080E1 MCM080E1 MCL110E1 —
* 300mm (12") DX model
6.4 Liebert Fin/Tube Condenser Selection—600mm (24") Units

Table 8 Traditional open room 95°F (35°C)/23RH return air conditions
Ambient Temperature Selection
95°F (35°C) 100°F (38°C)
Unit Units with Units with
Model No. Width VFD Units Liebert Lee-Temp VFD Units Liebert Lee-Temp
CR020A 600mm TCSV28K DCSL28K TCSV60K DCSL60K
CR035A (24") TCSV60K DCSL60K TCSV90K DCSL90K
6.5 General Piping Layout

1. Piping must be Type ACR copper tubing and sized per Tables 14, 11, 15 and 11.
NOTE
All field-installed piping must comply with applicable national, state and local codes.
Use the shortest possible refrigeration pipelines to minimize the total charge of refrigerant and
the number of pressure drops.
2. Minimize the number of bends and make the bends the largest radius practical to prevent
constricting refrigerant flow.
3. Insulate the piping as specified in Table 9. If the pipes are installed next to electrical cables, they
must be isolated from the building using vibration-isolating supports to avoid damage to cable
insulation.
4. There must be at least one inch (25mm) separation between the gas and liquid pipelines. If this is
not possible, insulate both lines.
5. Support both horizontal and vertical pipes with vibration-damping clamps, which include rubber
gaskets. Place these clamps every 5 to 7 ft. (1.5 to 2m).
Liebert® CRV™ 34
Table 9 Condenser positioning—Liebert MC and fin/tube condenser with or without Liebert Lee-Temp
Condenser and Condenser Below
Condenser Condenser Above Liebert CRV Liebert CRV
Position Liebert CRV at Same Level (Not Recommended)
Discharge Indoor necessary necessary necessary

Line Outdoor only for aesthetic reasons only for aesthetic reasons only for aesthetic reasons
Insulation
Liquid Indoor only for aesthetic reasons only for aesthetic reasons no (expose to cold under-floor air)
Line Outdoor only for aesthetic reasons only if exposed to sun only if exposed to sun
Room Unit
Gas
Room Unit
Room Unit
Liquid
(See **)
Layout
(See**)
Liquid
15 ft. (4.6m)
Gas
(See *)
Liquid
* Oil traps every 15 ft. (4.6m)

of vertical piping
** See Table 10
Table 10 Liebert CRV position relative to the remote condenser—Liebert MC and fin/tube condenser with
or without Liebert Lee-Temp
Parameter Maximum Distances, ft. (m)
From Liebert CRV to condenser 300 (91.4) equivalent length
From Liebert CRV to VFD condenser Above: 60 (18.3) Below: 15 (4.5)
From Liebert CRV to Liebert Lee-Temp™ condenser Above: 60 (18.3) Below: 0 (0)
Requirements
Base of Rise Exceeding 5 (1.5) and
Oil traps on vertical line of gas refrigerant
Every 15 (4.6)
Figure 26 Piping line cooling unit
COND
C
B
(Distance) D = A+B+C CDT
CDT = Conditioner A
COND = Condenser
35 Liebert® CRV™
Table 11 Recommended refrigerant line sizes, Cu, OD, for Liebert MC and VFD control fin/tube
condensers with R-410A with and without Liebert Lee-Temp
Liebert CRV Total Equivalent Hot Gas Line, Liquid Line
Model # Length, ft. (m) in. (mm) in. (mm)
50 (15.2) 3/4 (19.1) 5/8 (15.9)
CR019RA/ 100 (30.5) 3/4 (19.1) 5/8 (15.9)
CR020RA 150 (45.7) 3/4 (19.1) 5/8 (15.9)
300 (91.4) 7/8 (22.2)* 3/4 (19.1)
50 (15.2) 7/8 (22.2) 3/4 (19.1)
100 (30.5) 7/8 (22.2) 3/4 (19.1)
CR035RA
150 (45.7) 7/8 (22.2) 3/4 (19.1)
300 (91.4) 1-1/8 (28.6)* 7/8 (22.2)
Consult factory for proper line sizing for runs longer than 300 ft. (91.4m) equivalent length.
* Must downsize vertical riser one trade size (1-1/8” to 7/8” or 7/8” to 3/4”).
Source: DPN001623, Rev. 7, Page 3
Liebert® CRV™ 36
6.5.1 Heat Rejection Connection Sizes
! WARNING
Risk of explosive discharge of high-pressure refrigerant. Can cause equipment damage, injury
or death.
This unit contains high pressure refrigerant gas. Relieve pressure before making piping
connections.
Use only Type ACR copper tubing sized per Tables 11 through 15 for pipes connecting the
Liebert CRV and the condensing unit.
Table 12 Liebert MC Condenser piping sizes for 600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units
Number Connection Sizes, OD, in (mm)
Model No. of Fans Hot Gas Line Liquid Line
MCS028 1 7/8 5/8
MCM040 1 7/8 5/8
MCM080 2 1-1/8 7/8
MCL055 1 1-1/8 7/8
MCL 110 2 1-3/8 1-1/8
Table 13 Condenser piping connection sizes—single-circuit condensers with Liebert Lee-Temp
for 600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units
Condenser
Connections, OD.In Liebert Lee-Temp Connections
Liquid Line
Hot Gas Tee to Lee-Temp Valve Receiver Out
Model # Hot Gas Liquid IDS In. ODS, In. IDS In.
MCS028 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8 5/8
MCM040 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8 5/8
MCM080 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8
MCL055 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 7/8
MCL110 1-3/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-1/8 1-1/8
Table 14 Piping and refrigerant sizes for Liebert Lee-Temp™ fin/tube condensers with R-410A
Liebert CRV 600mm (24in.) Condenser Piping Connection Sizes
Condenser Connections, O.D., in. Liebert Lee-Temp Connections, I.D., in.
Liebert Lee-Temp Hot Gas Liquid To Receiver

Condenser Model # Hot Gas Liquid Size, in. (mm) Tee L-T Valve Out
DCSL28K 1-1/8 7/8 9 x 36 (229 x 914) 1-1/8 5/8 7/8
DCSL60K 1-1/8 7/8 11 x 36 (279 x 914) 1-1/8 5/8 7/8
DCSL90K 1-1/8 7/8 11 x 48 (279 x 1219) 1-1/8 5/8 7/8
Table 15 Piping and refrigerant sizes for Liebert air-cooled, VFD control condensers with R-410A
Liebert CRV 600mm (24in.) Condenser Piping Connection Sizes, Cu, O.D.
Entering Hot Gas Returning Liquid
Condenser Model # Line, in. (mm) Line, in. (mm)
TCSV28K 1-1/8 (28.6) 7/8 (22.2)
TCSV60K 1-1/8 (28.6) 7/8 (22.2)
TCSV90K 1-1/8 (28.6) 7/8 (22.2)
37 Liebert® CRV™
6.5.2 Piping Guidelines for Liebert MC and Fin/Tube Condensers

The following operations must be carried out by an experienced refrigeration technician.
NOTICE
Risk of oil contamination with water. Can cause equipment damage.
The piping must not be open to the atmosphere for extended periods because the Liebert CRV
requires POE (polyol ester) oil. POE oil absorbs water at a much faster rate when exposed to
air than previously used oils. Because water is the enemy of a reliable refrigeration system,
extreme care must be used when opening systems during installation or service. If water is
absorbed into the POE oil, it will not be easily removed and will not be removed through the
normal evacuation process. If the oil is too wet, it may require an oil change. POE oils also
have a property that makes them act as a solvent in a refrigeration system. Maintaining
system cleanliness is extremely important because the oil will tend to bring any foreign
matter back to the compressor.
1. When installing the refrigerant piping, note the following:
• Brazing:
• All joints must be brazed.
• Avoid butt brazes by using couplings or swaging one of the pipes with a swaging tool.
• Ensure that all brazed joints are leak-free.
• Flow dry nitrogen through the pipes during brazing.
• Always use large-radius curves (bending radius at least equal to pipe diameter). Bend the pipes
as follows:
• soft copper: bend by hand or use bending device;
• hard copper: use preformed curves.
• To minimize oxidation, avoid overheating the pipes when brazing.
2. Connect the pipes to the condenser:
• Condensers with butt-brazed pipe connections: Cut the pipe, enlarge it and braze it to the
pipeline.
Respect the direction of refrigerant flow. (See labels on refrigerant.)
3. Wash out the pipelines as follows:
a. Plug up the free ends of the pipes.
b. Connect a helium or nitrogen cylinder, fitted with a reducer (maximum pressure 10 bar), to
the 1/4" SAE Schrader valve of the condenser.
c. Pressurize the pipes with helium or nitrogen.
d. Unplug the pipes instantaneously.
e. Repeat Steps a through d several times.
This operation is especially important when hard copper piping is used.
4. Open all the shutoff valves on the room unit.
5. Discharge the room unit pressurized with helium (at 1 bar) by opening the charge valves so that
all the branches of the circuit are discharged (e.g., on the receiver, on the low pressure side and on
the compressor delivery).
6. Cut the spun-closed ends off the hot gas and liquid line connections on the Liebert CRV.
7. Fix (braze) the pipes to the connections on the air conditioner.
8. Air-Cooled Units—Connect the refrigerant safety pressure relief valve to the outdoors with a
5/8" (16mm) copper pipe if hot gas and liquid isolation valves are installed in the field.
NOTE
Not required on water/glycol units have a indoor relief valve.
Liebert® CRV™ 38
Figure 27 Connection locations—air-cooled 600mm (24") models
Unsolder when
connecting
Rear through bottom
1-1/8" (28mm)
23-5/8"
9-3/4" 12-3/4"
(600mm) (248mm) 1-3/4"
2-15/16" (325mm)
3-1/4" (83mm) 17-5/16" 3-1/16" (44mm)
(74mm) 8-7/8"
(440mm) (77mm) (226mm) RG
9-1/2" 9-5/16"
(242mm)
HS RG
(237mm)
2-11/16" RL 5-1/8"
46-1/4" GDH
CP RL (69mm) (130mm)
(1175mm) or HS
2-11/16"
2-11/16" (69mm)
(69mm)
CR 3-1/16" 2-15/16"
(77mm) (74mm)
1-3/4" 1-3/4" 3-13/16"
(97mm) HVB GD or CP
(45mm) (45mm)
HVT 2-1/8" (55mm)
1-1/2" LVB LVB2
(127mm)
LVT LVT (38mm) 5-3/8"

1-3/8" 7-13/16"
5"
(35mm) (199mm) (136mm)
4-13/16"
2-3/16" (56mm) 2-1/8" (54mm) (122mm) Bottom Connections
(possible with raised floor)
3-1/4" Top Connections
(83mm)
Piping and electrical connections available at the top and bottom of unit. DPN001792
Air-cooled systems may require oil to be added in the field to allow Rev. 2
sufficient compressor lubrication.
39 Liebert® CRV™
Table 16 Unit connection sizes, air-cooled models—600mm (24") models

Unit Connections CR20A (60Hz) CR35A (60Hz)
RL Refrigerant Liquid Line Inlet 1/2" O.D. Cu Sweat 5/8" O.D. Cu Sweat
RG Refrigerant Gas Line Outlet 5/8" O.D. Cu Sweat 7/8" O.D. Cu Sweat
GD Gravity Coil Pan Drain 1" MPT
GDH Gravity Humidifier Drain N/A
CP Condensate Pump 1/2" FPT
1/2" FPT (top connection)
HS Humidifier Supply
1/4" Compression Fitting (bottom connection)
Combination Knockout Hole
HVT High Voltage Top Connection Diameter 1-3/8" (35mm)
1-3/4" (44.5mm) and 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
High Voltage Bottom Entrance
HVB Knockout Hole Diameter 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
(feed through the base of the unit)
Knockout Hole Diameter 7/8" (22mm)
LVT Low Voltage Top Connection
2 places
Low Voltage Bottom Entrance Knockout Hole Diameter 1-3/32" (27.8mm)
LVB
(feed through the base of the unit) 2 places
Low Voltage Bottom Entrance Knockout Hole Diameter 1-3/4" (44.5mm)
LVB2
(feed through the base of the unit) 1 place
Source: DPN001792, Rev.2
Liebert® CRV™ 40
Figure 28 Connections—air-cooled 300mm (12") models

Front of Unit Front of Unit
10-1/2"
(267mm)
22-5/16" 11-5/8"
11-11/16" (567mm) (295mm) 15-9/16"
(296mm) 12-13/16" (395mm)
25-1/8" (325mm)
16-9/16"
(638mm) 14-9/16" (420mm)
(370mm)
27-13/16" 18-1/8"
(707mm) (460mm)
33-5/16" 2-3/8"
(846mm) (60mm) 37-1/2"
(952mm) 1-9/16" (39mm)
43-1/8"
CPT A 2-1/4" (57mm)
Cutout for RLB,
RGB and GD/CPB
(1-96mm) RLT 39-1/16" 2-5/8" (67mm)
3"
(992mm) 3-5/16" (76mm)
RGT
(84mm)
3-11/16" RLB
(94mm)
RGB
GD/CPB
HVT LVT2
LVB1
LVB2
HVB
LVT1 1-9/16" Bottom Connections

(40mm) (possible with raised floor)
Top Connections 2-3/4"
(70mm) DETAIL A
DPN002813
Rev. 2
Table 17 Key to unit connections in Figure 28
Top Dimensions Bottom Dimensions
Connection Description Top Connection Connection Description Bottom Connection
Refrigerant Liquid
RLT 1/2" O.D. Cu Sweat RLB Refrigerant Liquid Line Inlet 1/2" O.D. Cu Sweat
Line Inlet
Refrigerant Gas
RGT 5/8" O.D. Cu Sweat RGB Refrigerant Gas Line Outlet 5/8" O.D. Cu Sweat
Line Outlet
CPT Condensate Pump Knockout 3/4" (19mm) GD Gravity Coil Pan Drain Knockout 3/4" (19mm)
CPB Condensate Pump and 2" (51mm)
Combination
High-Voltage Top Knockout High-Voltage Bottom Combination Knockout
HVT
Connection 1-1/4" (32mm) and HVB Entrance (feed through 1-1/8" (29mm) and
1-3/4" (44mm) unit’s base) 1-3/4" (44mm)
Knockout Hole
Low-Voltage Top Low-Voltage Bottom Knockout Hole
LVT1 Diameter, LVB1
Connection Connection Diameter 7/8" (22mm)
2 places, 7/8" (22mm)
Knockout Hole
Low-Voltage Top Low-Voltage Bottom Knockout Hole
LVT2 Diameter, LVB2
Connection Connection Diameter 7/8" (22mm)
2 places, 7/8" (22mm)
41 Liebert® CRV™
6.6 Vacuum and Refrigerant Charge
NOTICE
Risk of improper refrigerant charge. Can cause equipment damage and reduced efficiency.
Check the refrigerant type to be used on the data plate of the air conditioner and on the
refrigerating compressor.
Table 18 Indoor unit charge R-410A refrigerant and oil charge for air-cooled models
Base Oil Charge Fluid Ounces of Oil
to Add for Every
Base Maximum System 10 lb. (4.5kg) of
Refrigerant Initial Oil Maximum Refrigerant Charge Refrigerant Over
Charge Charge Topping before Oil Addition, Maximum
Model lb (kg) oz (kg) Up, oz (kg) lb (kg) System Charge, oz (ml)
CR019RA 5 (2.7) 60 (1.68) 56 (1.57) 38 (17.1) 1.6 (48)
CR020RA 7 (3.2) 60 (1.68) 56 (1.57) 38 (17.1) 1.6 (48)
CR035RA 10 (4.5) 110 (3.08) 106 (2.97) 28 (12.6) 4 (120)
The recommended oil is EMKARATE RL 32-3MA.
Table 19 Interconnecting piping refrigerant charge

Liquid Line (+) Condensing
External Pipe Diameter Hot Gas Line Temperatures - R-410A, lb/ft (kg/m)
x Wall Thickness R-410A,
In. (mm) lb/feet (kg/m) 95°F (35°C) 115°F (46°C) 135°F (57°C)
1/2 x 0.049 (12 x 1) — 0.05 (0.08) 0.05 (0.07) 0.04 (0.07)
9/16 x 0.049 (14 x 1) 0.0084 (0.0124) 0.07 (0.11) 0.07 (0.11) 0.06 (0.10)
5/8 x 0.049 (16 x 1) 0.0114 (0.0169) 0.10 (0.16) 0.10 (0.14) 0.09 (0.13)
3/4 x 0.049 (18 x 1) 0.0149 (0.0221) 0.14 (0.20) 0.13 (0.19) 0.11 (0.17)
7/8 x 0.065 (22 x 1.25) 0.0232 (0.0346) — — —
1-1/8 x 0.065 (28 x 1.5) 0.0392 (0.0584) — — —
(+) Liquid pressure and density varies according to condensing temperature.
Table 20 Refrigerant required, R-410A, approximate for Liebert MC Condensers, with and without
Liebert Lee-Temp
Single Circuit, lb/circuit (kg/circuit)
Condenser Condensers w/o Condensers with
Models Liebert Lee-Temp Liebert Lee-Temp
MCS028 2.5 (1.2) 18.3 (8.4)
MCM040 3.5 (1.6) 19.3 (8.8)
MCM080 8.5 (3.8) 39.6 (18.1)
MCL055 5.0 (2.3) 24.2 (11.0)
MCL110 10.7 (4.9) 49.0 (22.2)
Table 21 Fin/tube condensers air-cooled condenser refrigerant charge

VFD Liebert Lee-Temp™
Model lb (kg) (Inc. Receiver), lb (kg)
28 K 7 (3.2) 41 (18.6)
60 K 16 (7.3) 75 (34.0)
90 K 25 (11.3) 109 (49.4)
1. Topping up is suggested for short pipeline, too, due to the extra-charge of refrigerant.
2. The air conditioner is supplied pressurized with helium at 1 bar.
3. DCSL or TCSV condenser
Liebert® CRV™ 42
Table 22 Refrigerant and oil charge for water-cooled models—600mm (24")

R-410A Refrigerant Initial Oil
Model Charge, lb (kg) Charge, lb (kg) 1
CR020RW 13.0 (5.9) 60 (1.68)
CR035RW 17.0 (7.7) 110 (3.08)
The air conditioner is supplied complete with refrigerant and oil.
1. The recommended oil is EMKARATE RL 32-3MA.
6.6.1 Evacuation Air-Cooled Models—600mm (24") and 300mm (12")Models

Proper leak check and evacuation can be accomplished only with all system solenoid valves open and
check valves accounted for.
NOTE
The system include a factory-installed check valve and an additional downstream Schrader
valve with core in the compressor discharge line. Proper evacuation of the condenser side of the
compressor can be accomplished only using the downstream Schrader valve. See piping
schematic.
1. If unit power is available, open the unit liquid line solenoid valves using the evacuation function
for System #1 in the diagnostic section of the Liebert iCOM® control (see Figure 91). If unit
power is not available, a field-supplied 24VAC / 75VA power source must be directly connected to
the unit solenoid valve.
2. Connect refrigerant gauges to the suction rotalock valves and discharge line Schrader valves.
3. Open the service valves and place a 150 PSIG (1034 kPa) of dry nitrogen with a tracer of
refrigerant. Check system for leaks with a suitable leak detector.
4. After completion of leak testing, release the test pressure (per local code) and pull an initial deep
vacuum on the system with a suitable pump.
5. After four hours, check the pressure readings and, if they have not changed, break vacuum with
dry nitrogen. Pull a second and third vacuum to 500 microns or less. Recheck the pressure after
two hours. After completing this step, proceed to the appropriate section:
• 6.7 Calculating Charging Values for Liebert MC Condenser Systems, Units without
Liebert Lee-Temp™ Systems
• 6.8 Charging Fin/Tube Condenser with Variable Fan Speed Control.
43 Liebert® CRV™
6.7 Calculating Charging Values for Liebert MC Condenser Systems, Units without
Liebert Lee-Temp™ Systems
The system must be fully piped and evacuated before it can be charged. See 6.6 Vacuum and
Refrigerant Charge.
Liebert MC condensers are charge-sensitive and require accurate calculation of the system charge to
avoid overcharging. To avoid overcharge, additional guidelines are recommended to ensure trouble
free operation.
• When charging system in an outdoor ambient below 50°F (10°C), recheck the subcooling against
Table 23 when the ambient is above 60°F (15.6°C)
• The indoor space should be maintained at 70 to 80°F (21 to 26.7°C) return air before final charge
adjustments are made.
• Charging unit at greater than 80°F (26.7°C) return air may result in the unit being overcharged.
• Charge by subcooling measurement at the indoor unit. See Table 23 for target subcooling
temperatures.
• Pressure and temperature measuring instruments should be capable of measuring to ±10 psig
(103.4kPa) and ± 2°F (1.1°C) for best subcooling measurement.
1. Check indoor nameplate for refrigerant type to be used. Unit control configurations differ
depending on refrigerant type.
2. Refrigerant charging requires unit operation. Refer to the indoor unit’s user manual for details
regarding indoor unit operation and to the Liebert MC user manual, SL-19536, available at the
Liebert Web site (www.liebert.com), for the Liebert MC condenser operation.
3. Calculate the amount of charge for the system. Refer to the indoor unit user manual and to the
condenser and refrigerant line charge data in the Liebert MC user manual, SL-19536, available at
the Liebert Web site.
4. Accurately weigh in as much of the system charge as possible before starting the unit. Do not
exceed the calculated charge by more than 0.5 lb (.37kg).
NOTICE
Risk of improper refrigerant charging. Can cause equipment damage.
Refrigerant R-407C and R-410A are blended refrigerants and must be introduced and charged
from the cylinder only as a liquid.
When adding liquid refrigerant to an operating system, it may be necessary to add the
refrigerant through the compressor suction service valve. Care must be exercised to avoid
damage to the compressor. Emerson recommends connecting a sight glass between the
charging hose and the compressor suction service valve. This will permit adjustment of the
cylinder hand valve so that liquid can leave the cylinder while allowing vapor to enter the
compressor.
NOTICE
Risk of refrigerant overcharge. Can cause equipment damage.
Do not use the sight glass as an indicator when charging Liebert MC condenser systems.
5. Turn On the Liebert MC disconnect switch.
6. Turn on the indoor unit disconnect switch. Operate the unit for 30 minutes using the charging
function of the indoor unit control for each circuit of the system. The charging function is in the
diagnostic section of the Liebert iCOM® control (see Liebert iCOM user manual, SL-18835). The
charging function operates the compressor(s) at full capacity and energizes the liquid line
solenoid valve(s). The reheat and humidifier are disabled. Manual operation of the indoor fans
from the diagnostic menu of the Liebert iCOM is required. A minimum 20psig (138kPa) must be
established and maintained for the compressor to operate. The charging function can be reset as
many times as required to complete unit charging.
7. Attach pressure and temperature instruments to the liquid line of the indoor unit. Measure the
initial subcooling and continue to add charge until recommended subcooling for the current
outdoor ambient temperature is reached. See Table 23. The outdoor ambient can be read from
the Liebert MC condenser control menu ID F02.
Liebert® CRV™ 44
NOTE
To determine subcooling measurement, a liquid line pressure reading (at the factory-installed
Schrader tap) needs to be measured along with obtaining a temperature reading on the liquid
line. Convert the liquid line pressure reading into a temperature by utilizing a Pressure-
Temperature Guide or Table 25. The difference between this converted temperature and the
actual temperature will determine the system’s subcooling. For R-407C make sure to use the
saturated liquid temperature to calculate subcooling.
Table 23 Target subcooling for ambient outdoor temperature

Ambient Temp Subcooling
°F (C°) °F (C°)
0 (-17.8) 22 (12.0)
10 (-12.2) 22 (12.0)
20 (-6.7) 22 (12.0)
30 (-1.1) 22 (12.0)
40 (4.4) 22 (12.0)
50 (10.0) 21 (11.7)
60 (15.6) 19 (10.8)
70 (21.1) 17 (9.3)
80 (26.7) 13 (7.2)
90 (32.2) 9 (5.0)
95 (35.0) 7 (3.9)
100 (37.8) 5 (2.9)
105 (40.6) 3 (1.8)
110 (43.3) 1 (0.7)
125 (51.7) 0
DPN002411, Rev. 3
8. Verify the subcooling calculated from measured values at the evaporator against the subcooling
reading of the Liebert MC control [menu ID F50 & F51]. If the subcooling calculated with gauges
differs from the Liebert MC subcooling by more than 3°F (1.7°C), then adjust the charge amount
to achieve the target subcooling per Table 23 based the Liebert MC control subcooling. Failure to
check measured subcooling with refrigerant gauges vs. Liebert MC subcooling may result in an
overcharged system. See Note below and Table 24 for corrections to Liebert MC subcooling that
may be required based on condenser elevation above the indoor evaporator.
NOTE
The evaporator subcooling will be greater than the condenser subcooling when the Liebert MC
is mounted higher than the indoor evaporator. Subcooling adjustment is needed when the
Liebert MC is more than 40 ft. (12m) above evaporator.
NOTE
Subcooling should be viewed at the Liebert MC condenser for a minimum of 1 minute and the
subcooling should be approximately ±2°F before recording subcooling to be compared against
subcooling from the field refrigerant gauges and thermometers.
45 Liebert® CRV™
Sample Calculations
The Liebert MC is 40 ft. (12.2m) above the evaporator of an R-410A system. The outdoor ambient
from the Liebert MC condenser control menu ID F02, is 94.8°F (34.9°C). The liquid pressure is
421 psig (2903kPA) and the liquid temperature is 113°F (45.1°C). The subcooling from the
Liebert MC control is 7°F (3.9°C). Determine the subcooling and verify the calculated subcooling
against the reading of the Liebert MC control (menu ID F50 and F51).
Evaporator Subcooling Calculation
Refrigerant Type R-410A
1. Ambient Temperature 94.8°F (34.9°C)
2. Condenser Elevation 40ft. (12.2m)
3. Condenser Elevation Temperature Correction 2°F (1.1°C)
4. Liquid Line Pressure 421psig (2902kPa)
5. Liquid Pressure Converted to Saturated Liquid
120.3°F (49.0°C)
Temperature
6. Measured Liquid Line Temperature 113.2°F (45.1°C)
7. MC Condenser Subcooling Reading (Menu ID
7°F (3.9°C)
F50 for Circuit #1 or Menu ID F51 for Circuit #2)
Subtract Line 6 (Measured Line Temperature) from Line 5 (Liquid Pressure converted to
Temperature) to obtain Calculated Subcooling.
Line 5 120.3°F (49.0°C)
Line 6 -113.2°F (45.1°C)
8. Calculated Subcooling 7.1°F or 7°F (3.9°C or (4°C)
Elevation Correction
Subtract Line 3 (Condenser Elevation Temperature Correction) from Line 8 (Calculated
Subcooling) to obtain Corrected Subcooling.
Line 8 7°F (3.9°C)
Line 3 -2°F - (2.2°C)
9. Corrected Subcooling 5°F (1.7°C)
Verification Against MC Condenser

Subtract Line 7 (MC Condenser Subcooling Reading) from Line 9 (Corrected Subcooling) to obtain
Difference.
Line 9 5°F (1.7°C)
Line 7 -7°F -(2.8°C)
10. Difference -2°F (-1.1°C)
• If Line 10 (Difference value) is less than ± 3°F (±1.7°C), NO charge adjustment is needed.
• If Line 10 (Difference value) is less than -3°F (-1.7°C), add additional charge.
If Line 10 (Difference value) is greater than +3°F (+1.7°C), the system is overcharged and
some of the charge must be removed.
Table 24 Difference in subcooling measurements—Indoor minus outdoor
Elevation Subcooling Correction - °F(°C)
Liebert MC elevation above
evaporator, ft (m) 80 (24) 60 (18) 40 (12) 20 (6)
R-22 12 (6.6) 9 (5.0) 5 (2.8) 1 (0.6)
Refrigerant R-407C 10 (5.5) 7 (3.8) 4 (2.2) 1 (0.6)
R-410A 6 (3.3) 4 (2.2) 2 (1.1) 0 (0.0)
* Assumes liquid line is sized for no more than 2°F (1.1°C)pressure drop.
9. As head pressure builds, the variable fan speed controlled condenser fan begins rotating. The fan
will run at full speed when sufficient head pressure is developed.
Liebert® CRV™ 46
Table 25 Liquid pressure and temperature chart

Pressure R-410A *
PSIG Bar °F °C
170 11.7 59.8 15.4
180 12.4 63.1 17.3
190 13.1 66.3 19.1
200 13.8 69.5 20.8
210 14.5 72.5 22.5
220 15.2 75.4 24.1
230 15.9 78.2 25.7
240 16.6 80.9 27.2
250 17.2 83.6 28.7
260 17.9 86.2 30.1
270 18.6 88.7 31.5
280 19.3 91.1 32.8
290 20.0 93.5 34.2
300 20.7 95.8 35.5
310 21.4 98.1 36.7
320 22.1 100.3 38.0
330 22.8 102.5 39.2
340 23.4 104.6 40.3
350 24.1 106.7 41.5
360 24.8 108.7 42.6
370 25.5 110.7 43.7
380 26.2 112.7 44.8
390 26.9 114.5 45.9
400 27.6 116.4 46.9
500 34.5 133.5 56.4
600 41.4 148.1 64.5
* Values are for saturated liquid
Evaporator Subcooling Calculation Worksheet

Circuit 1
Refrigerant Type
1. Ambient Temperature
2. Condenser Elevation
3. Condenser Elevation Temperature Correction
4. Liquid Line Pressure
5. Liquid Pressure converted to Temperature
6. Measured Liquid Line Temperature
7. MC Condenser Subcooling Reading
(Menu ID F50 for Circuit #1 or
Menu ID F51 for Circuit #2)
47 Liebert® CRV™
Subtract Line 6 (Measured Line Temperature) from Line 5 (Liquid Pressure converted to
Temperature) to obtain Calculated Subcooling.
Circuit 1
Line 5
Line 6
8. Calculated Subcooling
Elevation Correction
Subtract Line 3 (Correction for Condenser Elevation above Evaporator) from Line 8 (Calculated
Subcooling) to obtain Corrected Subcooling.
Circuit 1
Line 8
Line 3
9. Corrected Subcooling
Verification Against MC Condenser

Subtract Line 7 (MC Condenser Subcooling Reading) from Line 9 (Corrected Subcooling) to obtain
Difference.
Circuit 1
Line 9
Line 7
10. Difference
• If Line 10 (Difference value) is less than ± 3°F, NO charge adjustment is needed.

• If Line 10 (Difference value) is greater than -3°F, add additional charge.
• If Line 10 (Difference value) is greater than +3°F, remove charge.
Liebert® CRV™ 48
6.8 Charging Fin/Tube Condenser with Variable Fan Speed Control

The system must be fully piped and evacuated before it can be charged. See 6.6 Vacuum and
Refrigerant Charge.
1. Check unit nameplate for refrigerant type to be used. Unit control configurations differ depending
on refrigerant type.
2. Charging the system with refrigerant requires the unit to be in an operational state.
3. Calculate the amount of charge for the system. Refer to the unit, condenser and refrigerant line
charge data in Tables 18, 19 and 21.
4. Weigh in as much of the system charge as possible before starting the unit.
NOTICE
Risk of improper refrigerant charging. Can cause equipment damage.
Refrigerant R-410A is a blend of two components and must be introduced and charged from
the cylinder only as a liquid.
When adding liquid refrigerant to an operating system, it may be necessary to add the
refrigerant through the compressor suction service valve. Care must be exercised to avoid
damage to the compressor. Emerson recommends connecting a sight glass between the
charging hose and the compressor suction service valve. This will permit adjustment of the
cylinder hand valve so that liquid can leave the cylinder while allowing vapor to enter the
compressor.
5. Turn On unit disconnect switch. Operate the unit for 30 minutes using the charging function in
the diagnostic section of the Liebert iCOM® control (see Figure 91). The charging function
operates the compressor at full capacity and energizes the blower motor and the liquid line
solenoid valve. The reheat and humidifier are disabled. A minimum 20psig (138kPa) must be
established and maintained for the compressor to operate. The charging function can be reset as
many times as required to complete unit charging.
6. Charge the unit until the liquid line sight glass becomes clear, then add one additional pound
(2.2kg) of refrigerant.
NOTE
A digital scroll compressor will have a clear sight glass only when operating at 100% capacity.
When operating below 100%, the sight glass may show bubbles with each 15-second unloading
cycle.
7. As head pressure builds, the variable fan speed controlled condenser fan begins rotating. The fan
will run at full speed when sufficient head pressure is developed—fan starts to rotate at 310psig
(2137kPa) and is full speed at 400psig (2758kPa).
49 Liebert® CRV™
Water Connections for Water/Glycol Units—600mm (24") Models
7.0 WATER CONNECTIONS FOR WATER/GLYCOL UNITS—600MM (24") MODELS
NOTICE
system down time.
Table 26 Water connection options
Liebert CRV Option Top Connections Bottom Connections
Condensate Pump
Available Available
and Humidifier
Condensate Pump
Available Available
and No Humidifier
No Condensate Pump
Not Available Available
and No Humidifier
Table 27 Volume of CRV internal water circuits
Model Volume, gal., (L)
CR020RW 1.27 (4.8)
CR035RW 1.51 (5.7)
CR040RC 4.65 (17.6)\
Liebert® CRV™ 50
7.1 Water Connections—Supply Humidifier and Drain Water

Units with a condensate pump and humidifier are preset to be connected from the top. If floor
connections are used, the water lines can be intercepted at the following points:
Figure 29 Water connection points, bottom entry
Condensate
Pump Drain
Humidifier
Water Supply
• Condensate drain without pump:

• Use tubing rated to carry water up to 212°F (100°C) copper, PVC or flexible polythene tubing.
• Allow a 2% gradient toward the drain.
• Drain is trapped internally. Do not trap the drain external to the equipment.
• Fill the drain trap with water.
• Humidifier (optional): See Appendix A - Humidifier—600mm (24") Units Only.
7.2 Glycol Mixture

Add ethylene glycol or propylene glycol to the circuit in the percentages shown in Table 28.
Table 28 Glycol mixtures
Glycol Percentage * Ethylene Glycol - Propylene Glycol -
by Volume Freezing Temperature, °F (°C) Freezing Temperature, °F (°C)
0% 32 (0) 32 (0)
10% 25.3 (-3.7) 28.9 (-1.7)
20% 16 (-8.9) 18.7 (-7.4)
30% 3.7 (-15.7) 8.4 (-13.1)
40% -12.6 (-24.8) -6.7 (-21.5)
* Freezing temperatures may vary slightly among commercially available glycol products; refer to manufacturer’s specifications.
51 Liebert® CRV™
7.3 Water Connections: Water/Glycol-Cooled Models

The unit must receive cooling water as follows:
•From an external cooling water source, in open circuit.
•Using a drycooler, in closed circuit.
1. Connect the piping as shown in 5.2 Refrigeration and Hydraulic Circuits.
2. Use hoses connected with three-piece joints to the condenser water inlet and outlet couplings.
3. Install a field-supplied16-20 mesh strainer on the water/glycol supply to the Liebert CRV. The
strainer is needed to prevent particles in the water from entering the unit’s heat exchanger.
4. Place shutoff ball valves at the conditioner inlet and outlet to allow easy maintenance.
5. Install a water drain system at the lowest point in the circuit.
6. Fully drain the piping before connecting it to the air conditioner.
7.3.1 Notes for Open-Circuit Applications

• Use the unit with mains or well water. Do not use water from an evaporative cooling tower unless
the water hardness is controlled.
• The water pressure must be 29-145psi (2-10 bar). If water pressure is outside this range, contact
Emerson for technical support.
• The required water flow at different temperatures is available from Emerson.
• If water temperature is very low, insulate both pipes.
7.3.2 Notes for Closed-Circuit Applications
• Install a pump system calculated on the basis of the flow and total head of the system (see site
plan data) and controlled by the compressor running (see label on the Liebert CRV).
• Insulate both pipes.
• Very important: Add water and ethylene glycol to the circuit when the ambient temperature is
below 32°F (0°C); refer to the Liebert CRV technical data manual, SL-11978). Do not exceed the
nominal operating pressure of the circuit components.
• Bleed air out of the circuit.
Figure 30 Recommended drycooler installation
Disconnect Fill
After Charge Water
HTC TS
Pressure-Operated Bypass
Standby Pump
Liebert
CRV
(optional)
Shutoff Valve TS Thermostat (*) Charge Group (Filter,

HTC Variex (50Hz Opt.) Reducer, Check Valve)
Pump
Filling Meter
Check Valve Safety Valve
Drain (at Lowest Point)
Gauge Expansion Tank
Air Separator
Liebert® CRV™ 52
Figure 31 Connections—water/glycol models
6-1/8" 4-1/8"
(155mm) (105mm)
Piping and electrical 1-1/8"

connections available at (28mm)
Rear
the top and bottom of unit.
9-3/4" 12-3/4"
Top Connections (248mm) (325mm) 1-3/4"
8-7/8" CR (44mm)
3-1/4" 17-5/16" 3-1/16" 2-15/16" (226mm)
(83mm) (440mm) (77mm) (74mm)
9-1/2" 9-5/16"
(242mm) HS CR (237mm) GDH
2-11/16" or HS
CS 5-1/8"
(69mm)
(130mm)
CP CS
2-11/16" 2-11/16"
(69mm) (69mm) 3-7/8"
(98mm)
3-1/16"
46-1/4" 3-13/16" (77mm)
(1175mm) (97mm)
HVB GD
1-3/4" (45mm)
1-3/4" or CP
(35mm)
(45mm) 2-1/8" (55mm)

1-3/8"
LVT
HVT 1-1/2" LVB
(38mm) 7-13/16"
(127mm)
LVT (199mm) LVB

5"
4-13/16" 5-3/8"
2-3/16" (136mm)
2-1/8" (122mm)
2-3/16" (56mm) (56mm) Bottom Connections
(54mm) (possible with raised floor)
3-1/4" (83mm)
23-5/8"
(600mm)
* Install a 16-20 mesh strainer, in an easily accessible location, on the Water/Glycol Supply
to prevent particles from entering the heat exchanger. Strainer bypass valves are DPN001793
recommended to allow the strainer to be cleaned while maintaining flow to the cooling unit. Rev. 2
Table 29 Unit connections, water/glycol-cooled models
Unit Connections CR20W (60Hz) CR35W (60Hz)
CS Water/Glycol Coolant Supply 1-1/4" FPT
CR Water/Glycol Coolant Return 1-1/4" FPT
HS Humidifier Supply
1/4" Compression Fitting (bottom connection)
1-3/4" (44.5mm) and 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
High Voltage Bottom Entrance
HVB Knockout Hole Diameter 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
(feed through the base of the unit)
Knockout Hole Diameter
7/8" (22mm) 2 places
Low Voltage Bottom Entrance Knockout Hole Diameter
LVB
(feed through the base of the unit) 1-3/32" (27.8mm) 2 places
LVB2
(feed through the base of the unit) 1-3/4" (44.5mm) 1 place
53 Liebert® CRV™
Water Connections for Chilled Water Units—600mm (24") Units
8.0 WATER CONNECTIONS FOR CHILLED WATER UNITS—600MM (24") UNITS
NOTICE
system down time.
Commercial ethylene glycol, when pure, is generally less corrosive to the common metals of
construction than water itself. It will, however, assume the corrosivity of the water from
which it is prepared and may become increasingly corrosive with use if not properly inhibited.
Figure 32 Chilled water connections
Top Connections
Bottom Rear Connections
Liebert® CRV™ 54
Refer to Figure 33 when performing these installation steps:

• Use copper tubing or steel pipe.
• Place the tubing on supporting saddles.
• Insulate both tubes
• Install shutoff ball valves on the inlet and outlet pipes to ease maintenance.
• Install optional thermostats and pressure gauges on the inlet and outlet pipes.
• Install a water drain tap at the lowest point in the circuit.
• Fill the circuit with water or glycol.
Figure 33 Chilled water circuit
Pressure Liebert CRV

Gauge
Insulation Thermostat
Ball
Valves
Tubing Support Water Drain Tap
55 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 34 Connections—chilled water models
Piping and electrical

connections available 6-1/8" 4-1/8"
at the top and bottom (155mm) (105mm)
of the unit.
REAR
1-1/8"
(28mm)
9-3/4"
TOP CONNECTIONS (248mm) 12-3/4"
(325mm) 1-3/4"
3-1/4" (83mm) 17-5/16" 2-15/16" 8-7/8"
3-1/16" (77mm) (74mm) (226mm) (44mm)
(440mm) CWR
9-1/2" 9-5/16"
HS CWR GDH or HS 5-1/8"
(242mm) (237mm)
(130mm)
2-11/16"
CP CWS (69mm) CWS
2-11/16"
2-11/16"
(69mm)
(69mm)
46-1/4" 3-1/16") 3-7/8"
(1175mm) (77mm) (98mm)
1-3/4" (45mm) 3-13/16"
1-3/4" (97) HVB GD or CP
LVT
(45) HVT 1-1/2"
1-3/8"
LVT (38mm) LVB2
5" (35) LVB
(127mm) 7-13/16"
(199mm) 5-3/8" (136mm)
2-1/8" (54mm)
2-3/16" (56mm) 2-1/8" (54mm) 4-13/16"
(122mm) 2-3/16"(56mm) BOTTOM CONNECTIONS DPN001794
3-1/4" (83mm) 23-5/8" (600mm) (possible with raised floor) Rev. 2
Table 30 Unit connections, chilled water models

Unit Connections CR040C (60 Hz)
CWS Chilled Water Supply 1-1/4" FPT
CWR Chilled Water Return 1-1/4" FPT
HS Humidifier Supply 1/4" Compression Fitting
(bottom connection)
1-3/4" (44.5mm) and 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
High Voltage Bottom Entrance Knockout Hole Diameter
HVB
(feed through the base of the unit) 2-1/2" (63.5mm)
Knockout Hole Diameter
7/8" (22mm) 4 Places
LVB
(feed through the base of the unit) 1-3/32" (27.8mm) 2 Places
Low Voltage Bottom Entrance Combination Knockout Hole
LVB2
(feed through the base of the unit) Diameter 1-3/4" (44.5mm) 1 Place
Liebert® CRV™ 56
Electrical Connections
9.0 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
9.1 Electrical Field Connections Descriptions

9.1.1 Standard Electrical Connections—600mm (24") models
(Source: DPN001884, Rev. 5, Page 1)
1. High Voltage Connection Through the Bottom of the Electric Panel—1-3/8" (34.9mm),
1-3/4" (44.5mm) 2-1/2" (64mm) diameter concentric knockout.
2. Low Voltage Connection Through the Bottom of the Electric Panel—Quantity (2) 7/8"
(22mm) diameter knockouts.
3. High Voltage Connection Through the Top of the Unit—1-3/8" (34.9mm), 1-3/4" (44.5mm)
and 2-1/2" (64mm) diameter concentric knockout.
4. Low Voltage Connection Through the Top of the Unit—Quantity (4) 7/8" (22mm) diameter
knockouts.
5. Three-Phase Electrical Service—Connect to terminals on disconnect switch. Three-phase
service not by Liebert (see NOTICE on page 58).
6. Factory-Installed locking Disconnect Switch
7. Earth Ground—Terminal for field-supplied earth grounding wire.
8. Remote Unit Shutdown—Replace existing jumper between Terminals 37 and 38 with
field-supplied normally closed switch having a minimum 75VA, 24VAC rating. Use field-supplied
Class 1 wiring.
9. Customer Alarm Inputs—Terminals for field supplied, normally closed contacts, having a
minimum 75VA, 24VAC rating, between Terminals 3 and 50, 2 and 51, 5 and 55 or between 3 and
56. Use Class 1, field-supplied wiring. Terminals 3 and 56 are used for humidifier alarm when a
humidifier is installed. The remaining terminals are available for customer alarm inputs, such as
smoke sensors and building fire alarms.
10. Common Alarm—On any alarm, normally open dry contact is closed across Terminals 75 and 76
for remote indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied Class 1 wiring.
11. Heat Rejection Interlock—On any call for compressor operation, normally open dry contact is
closed across Terminals 70 and 71 to heat rejection equipment. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use
field-supplied Class 1 wiring.
12. CANbus Connector—Terminal block with terminals 49-1 (CAN-H) and 49-3 (CAN-L) + SH
(shield connection). The terminals are used to connect the CANbus communication cable
(provided by others) from the indoor unit to the Liebert MC (Premium Model).
The CANbus cable, provided by others and used to connect to the outdoor condenser, must have
the following specifications:
a. Conductors—22-18AWG stranded tinned copper
b. Twisted pair (minimum eight twists per foot [305mm])
c. Braided shield or foil shield with drain wire
d. Low Capacitance—15pf/ft or less
e. UL approved temperature rated to 167°F (75°C)
f. UL approved voltage rated to 300V
g. UV- and moisture-resistant if not provided in conduit.
h. Plenum rated—NEC type CMP (if required by national or local codes.)
57 Liebert® CRV™
9.1.2 Electrical Connections for Optional Features—600mm (24") models

(Source: DPN001884, Rev. 5, Page 2)
13. Condensate Pump High Water Alarm (available when optional pump is installed)—On
pump high water indication, normally open dry contact is closed across Terminals 88 and 89 for
remote indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied Class 1 wiring.
14. Liebert Liqui-tect® Shutdown and Dry Contact (Available When Optional Liebert
Liqui-tect Sensor is Installed)—On Liebert Liqui-tect activation, normally open dry contact is
closed across Terminals 58 and 59 for remote indication. The Liebert Liqui-tect sensor notifies
Liebert iCOM® of indication through Terminals 60 and 61. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use
15. Reheat and humidifier lockout—Remote 24VAC required at Terminals 82 and 83 for lockout
of reheat and humidifier.
16. Additional Common Alarm—On any alarm, one additional normally open dry contact is closed
across Terminals 94 and 95 for remote indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied
Class 1 wiring.
NOTE
Refer to specification sheet for total unit full load amps, wire size amps and maximum
overcurrent protective device size.
NOTICE
Risk of improper input power. Can cause equipment damage.
The electronically commutated motors included in the Liebert CRV unit —included in 480V
CR035 and CR040 units—are suitable for connection to an electrical service providing input
power to the unit with 300V or less line-to-ground potential only.
Acceptable unit input electrical service for 460V (480V) nominal units:
• 480V wye with solidly grounded neutral and 277V line-to-ground
Unacceptable unit input electrical service for 460V (480V) nominal units:
• Wye with high resistance (or impedance) ground
• Delta without ground or with floating ground
• Delta with corner ground
• Delta with grounded center tap
Liebert® CRV™ 58
Figure 35 Electrical field connections—600mm (24") models

Refer to 9.1.1 Standard Electrical
Connections—600mm (24") models
3 and 9.1.2 Electrical Connections for
Optional Features—600mm (24")
Unit Top
models for keys to numbered
4 2-1/2" (64mm) components.
knockout Unit
4 Base
1-3/32" (28mm)
knockout 1-3/4"
(44.5mm)
Unit Front knockout
Unit
Front
16
OVERLOAD PROTECTORS 10
Not
Used
13
15
Not
CONTACTORS Used
12
11
8
14
UNIT 9
DISCONNECT
SWITCH
7 Factory
Terminals
9
5, 6
2 DPN001884
Typically, 2 Pg. 3, Rev. 5
1
59 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 36 CANbus communication connection Liebert CRV and Liebert MC (premium) unit
P80 BA P15
TB50
1
CAN H
TB50
1
2
OUTPUT D58
J6
3 CAN L
L
Condenser
3
H
TB49 J4
3
TB49
1
ON
INPUT 2
L
3
1
J6
3
CAN SW6
TB50
1
1 CA
NH
OUT
PUT 2
3 CA
NL
TB49
1
INPU
T 2
3
BOOTPSWD SYS APP

ON
CAN SW6
Detail1
CAN Cable (A) Connection
Shield Connection Remove Jumper
Factory Wiring
SH Between Liebert
A MC Control Board B
70
71
and Terminal Strip
Low-Voltage Field B
230
A
Entrance Located
on Bottom Left of Heat Rejection
Condenser Enclosure Interlock (B)
P78
1 3
CAN Cable (A)

Connection
Shield
Connection
Heat Rejection
Factory Wiring Between Liebert iCOM Interlock (B)
and Terminal Strip
Liebert CRV Indoor Unit
COMPONENT NOTES
1. Component appearance, orientation and position may vary.
Terminal names and callouts remain constant.
CABLE NOTES (A):
1. Field Supplied Cable.
● Shielded
● 22-18awg Stranded Tinned Copper
● Twisted Pair (minimum 8 twists per foot)
● Low capacitance (15pf/ft or less)
● Must be rated to meet local codes and conditions.
● Examples Belden 89207 (plenum rated), or alpha wire 6454 Category 5, 5e or higher.
2. Do not run in same conduit, raceway or chase as high-voltage wiring.
3. For CANbus network lengths greater than 350ft (107m), contact Liebert factory.
WIRE NOTES (B)
1. Field Supplied Wire
● 18AWG or greater
DPN002841
● Rated 600V Rev. 0
2. Run two wires from indoor unit to condenser(s).
Liebert® CRV™ 60
9.1.3 Standard Electrical Field Connections—300mm (12") DX Models

1. High-Voltage Connection Through the Rear of the Switch Box—1-1/8" (28.6mm) and
1-3/4" (44.5mm) diameter concentric knockout.
2. Low-Voltage Connection Through the Bottom of the Unit—Quantity of two 7/8" (22mm)
diameter knockouts, not shown; see Figure 28.
3. High-Voltage Connection Through the Top of the Unit—1-1/4" (32mm) and 1-3/4" (44.5mm)
diameter concentric knockout, not shown; see Figure 28.
4. Low-Voltage Connection Through the Top of the Unit—Two knockouts, 7/8" (22mm)
diameter, not shown; see Figure 28.
5. Three-Phase Electrical Service—Connect to terminals on disconnect switch. Three-phase
service not by Emerson. (Refer to serial tag for total unit full load amps, wire size amps and
maximum overcurrent protective device size.
6. Factory-Installed Locking Disconnect Switch
7. Earth Ground—Terminal for field-supplied earth grounding wire.
8. Remote Unit Shutdown—Replace existing jumper between Terminals 37 and 38 with
field-supplied normally closed switch having a minimum 75VA, 24VAC rating. Use field-supplied
Class 1 wiring.
9. Customer Alarm Inputs—Terminals for field-supplied, normally closed contacts, having a
minimum 75VA, 24VAC rating, between Terminals 3 and 50, 2 and 51, 5 and 55 or 3 and 56. Use
field-supplied Class 1 wiring. Terminals 5 and 55 not available when optional Condensate Pump
is installed.
10. ) Common Alarm—On any alarm, normally open dry contact is closed across Terminals 75 and
76 for remote indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied Class 1 wiring.
11. Heat Rejection Interlock—On any call for compressor operation, normally open dry contact is
closed across Terminals 70 and 71 to heat rejection equipment. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use
12. CANbus Connector—Terminal block with Terminals 49-1 (CAN-H) and 49-3 (CAN-L) + SH
(shield connection). The terminals are used to connect the CANbus communication cable (field
supplied) from the indoor unit to the Liebert MC Condenser-Premium Model.
CANbus Cable—CANbus cable provided by others to connect to the outdoor condenser. Cable
must have the following specifications:
a. Conductors—22-18AWG stranded, tinned copper
b. Twisted pair (minimum eight twists per foot [305mm])
c. Braided shield or foil shield with drain wire
d. Low capacitance—15pf/ft or less
e. UL-approved temperature rated to 167°F (75°C)
f. UL-approved voltage rated to 300V
g. UV- and moisture-resistant if not provided in conduit
h. Plenum rated—NEC type CMP (if required by national or local codes)
9.1.4 Electrical Field Connections for Optional Features—300mm (12") DX Models
13. Condensate Pump High Water Alarm (available when optional pump is installed)—On pump
high water indication, normally open dry contact is closed across Terminals 88 and 89 for remote
indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied Class 1 wiring.
14. Liebert Liqui-tect® Shutdown and Dry Contact (available when optional Liebert Liqui-tect
sensor is installed)—On Liebert Liqui-tect activation, normally open dry contact is closed across
Terminals 58 and 59 for remote indication. The Liebert Liqui-tect sensor notifies Liebert iCOM®
of indication through Terminals 60 and 61. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied Class 1
wiring.
15. Additional Common Alarm—On any alarm, one additional normally open dry contact is closed
across Terminals 94 and 95 for remote indication. 1A, 24VAC maximum load. Use field-supplied
Class 1 wiring.
61 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 37 Electrical field connections—300mm (12") DX models

Refer to 9.1.3 Standard Electrical Field Connections—300mm (12") DX See Figure 38 for low-voltage
Models and 9.1.4 Electrical Field Connections for Optional Features— field wiring routing into the unit
300mm (12") DX Models for keys to numbered components.
Ø 1.75"
5 A (44.5mm) K.O.
Ø 1.13"
7
Disconnect (28.6mm) K.O.
handle
and cover 1
removed
A
View A-A
Factory-provided conduit for routing
low-voltage field wiring to unit
3 electric box. See note below.
B
4 15 10 9 12
Rear
View
B
VIEW B-B
Terminals
Factory
Upper terminals
13 11 14 8 9 9
Air, Water and
Glycol units only
Factory-provided
conduit for routing
low-voltage field
wiring to unit
electric box. See
note below.
Quarter-Turn Latch allows

the electric panel to be slid
out; Main Disconnect Switch VIEW B-B DPN002810
must be Off Lower terminals Pg. 3, Rev. 2
SOME COMPONENTS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
General wire routing paths shown. Wiring must be run in conduit and must be inside
Liebert CRV frame and panels. Attach conduit to inside of rails with cable ties.
Control wiring must be run in separate conduit from power wiring. For top entry routing,
see Figure 44; for bottom entry, see Figure 45.
Liebert® CRV™ 62
Figure 38 Low-voltage field wiring routing into the unit—300mm (12") DX
Low-Voltage
Knockout
Factory Wiring
Low-Voltage
Field Wiring
63 Liebert® CRV™
9.2 Electrical Connections
! WARNING
the electrical control enclosure.
mode.
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock. Can cause injury or death.
This unit has a high leakage current potential. Proper earth ground connection per national
and local codes is required before connection to the electric power supply.
Before proceeding with the electrical connections, ensure that:

• all electrical components are undamaged
• all terminal screws are tight
• the supply voltage and frequency are as indicated on the unit
NOTE
The serial tag on the 600mm (24") unit will be found on the inside of the display panel. The
serial tag on the 300mm (12") units will be on the narrow side of the electric panel, nearest the
filters.
Liebert® CRV™ 64
Figure 39 Serial tag location——600mm (24") models
Serial Tag
600mm (24" Unit)
Figure 40 Remove electrical panel and lower front panel—600mm (24") models
Remove these bolts
to access high-voltage
electrical panel
Remove these
bolts to access
low voltage
electrical panel
Remove these bolts

to open lower front
baffle panel
65 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 41 Pull out the electric panel—300mm (12") DX models
Main Disconnect
Switch (locks
electrical panel
position; switch
must be Off before
turning quarter-turn
lock; electric panel
must be fully inside
the Liebert CRV
before switch can Low-voltage
be turned On) electrical panel
Low-voltage
electrical wiring
conduit; lower
conduit carries
factory wiring
Electric panel
slides out after
filters are
removed if Main
Disconnect is Off
Quarter-Turn Latch
opens high-voltage
electric panel (all
connections made at
factory). The
Rear of Liebert CRV disconnect switch
300mm(12") Unit must be turned Off
Filters removed for before electric box
access to electric will slide out. Rear of Liebert CRV
panel 300mm(12") Unit
Filters Installed
Liebert® CRV™ 66
Figure 42 Power and control cable entry points and routing—600mm (24") models
High Voltage Top Low Voltage Top Low Voltage Channel
High Voltage opening provides access
Top Entry Port Entry Port Entry Port
to the electrical panel
Low-voltage cables are

routed through a channel
in the side panel to
connect the bottom of the
unit to the electrical panel
Liebert IntelliSlot Bays
Low-Voltage
Bottom
Entry Port
High-Voltage
Cable Path
High-Voltage Bottom
Entry Knockout
Low-Voltage
Cable Path to
Electrical Panel
67 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 43 Power cable routing—Bottom entry, 300mm (12") DX models
Use rear knockout

on Main Disconnect
for high-voltage wire entry.
General wire routing paths shown. Wiring must be

run in conduit and must be inside Liebert CRV frame
and panels. Attach conduit to inside of rails with
cable ties.
Control wiring must be run in separate conduit from

power wiring. Refer to Figure 45 for bottom entry
wire routing.
Front
High-Voltage Wire Routing

Bottom Entry Point
Rear
Liebert® CRV™ 68
Figure 44 Liebert IntelliSlot cable routing—Top entry, 300mm (12") DX models
Low-voltage field wiring

(twisted pair)
Low-voltage
field wiring
(twisted pair
DPN002814
Pg. 1, Rev. 3
69 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 45 Liebert IntelliSlot cable routing—Bottom entry, 300mm (12") DX models
General wire routing paths shown. Wiring must be

run in conduit and must be inside Liebert CRV frame
and panels. Attach conduit to inside of rails with
cable ties.
Shielded cable may be used. If not, control wiring

must be run in separate conduit from power wiring.
Secure the control wiring or conduit to the bottom

edge of the rail with cable ties. Route the shielded
cable up toward the Liebert IntelliSlot bays and
fasten to the side rails as needed.

(shielded cable)

(twisted pair)
DPN002814
Pg. 2, Rev. 3
Secure tie the field wiring shielded cable to
the rail. Route the shielded cable up toward
the Liebert IntelliSlots and fasten to the side rails
as needed.
Liebert® CRV™ 70
9.2.1 Power Supply Cable Connections

• Connect the cable to the line inlet terminal board.
• Use the appropriate cable size for the current draw, supply voltage and installation type.
• Protect the supply using a backup fuse or circuit breaker.
• Do not fit the supply cable in the raceways inside the unit’s electric board—600mm (24") units.
• Use only multipolar cables with sheath (CEI20-22).
Wiring Connections
• Remote On/Off connections must be provided by the installer.
• The General Alarm terminals allow remote alarm signalling.
In case of short circuit, check the affected switch for sticking and replace it if necessary.
See electrical data in Table 38.
9.3 Protective Features of the Electronically Commutated Fans—All Models

The EC fans are protected against:
• Overtemperature of electronics
• Overtemperature of motor
• Locked rotor protection
• Short circuit at the motor output
When any of these failures occurs, the motor stops, electronically, with no potential for separation,
and the status relay is released.
The unit does not restart automatic automatically. To reset the alarm, the power supply must be
switched Off for 20 minutes once motor is at standstill.
• Input power undervoltage detection:
If the utility power falls below 3ph/290VAC (typical value) for 5 seconds or longer, the motor is
switched Off, electronically, with no potential for separation, and the status relay is released.
When the utility voltage returns to a correct value, the motor restarts automatically.
• Phase failure recognition:
If one phase fails for 5 seconds or longer, the motor is switched Off, electronically, with no
potential for separation, and the status relay is released.
When all three phases return to correct values, the motor restarts automatically in 10 to 40
seconds.
The power supply for an external speed-setting potentiometer is protected against short-circuiting.
The motor is overload-protected via motor current limitation.
71 Liebert® CRV™
9.4 Protective Features of Electrical Heaters—600mm (24") Models

Figure 46 Electrical heating with temperature sensor protection
Temperature
sensor
protection
When the temperature sensor detects overtemperature of electrical heating, the thermal protection
turns Off the current. To reset the thermal protection, push the button on the front of the unit (see
Figure 46).
Liebert® CRV™ 72
Startup
10.0 STARTUP
10.1 Initial Startup
! WARNING
Keep hair, jewelry and loose clothing secured and away from rotating fan blades during unit
operation.
! WARNING
Risk of contact with rotating fan blades. Can cause injury or death.
The Liebert CRV’s fan blades will continue rotating after the unit is shut Off. Open all local
and remote electric power supply disconnect switches, verify with a voltmeter that power is
off and verify that the fan blades have stopped rotating before working on the unit.
To start the Liebert CRV:
1. Open all valves in the refrigeration circuit according to the instruction label attached to the valve.
2. W Models Only: Open all valves in the water circuit according to the instruction label attached
to the valve.
3. Ensure that the refrigerant charge is correct (see 6.0 Refrigerant Connections for Air-Cooled
Units).
4. Using a leak detector, verify that there are no refrigerant leaks. If any leaks are detected, repair
them and recharge as described in 6.0 Refrigerant Connections for Air-Cooled Units.
5. At least 4 hours before startup, close the main switch and the compressor switch on the electric
panel.
NOTE
The default setting for the Liebert iCOM® control is for stand-alone operation. The stand-alone
mode allows users to turn on the unit simply by rotating the main switch on the electrical
panel. The yellow LED on the Liebert iCOM will light after the unit is turned on because
electrical power is present.
If the LED does not light:
• check the electrical panel power supply
• check the protection devices (e.g., thermal switches)
• check the fuses.
6. Verify that the crankcase heater is working.
7. Check to ensure that there are no water leaks.
8. If an external condenser or drycooler is installed, start it by supplying power to it.
9. Close all MCB’s on the electrical panel.
10. Check the supply voltage on all phases.
11. Check the supply voltage on all phases for the external condenser or drycooler, if fitted.
12. Start the unit by pressing the On/Off switch.
13. Check the amp draw of all components (see 9.0 Electrical Connections).
14. Check the amp draw of the external condenser/drycooler, if fitted.
15. If the compressor makes a loud, unusual noise, invert the electrical connections of the phases
supplying the corresponding digital scroll compressor, which accepts only one direction of
rotation.
16. Ensure that the fans rotate in the correct direction (see arrow on fan).
17. Ensure that all control system settings are correct and that there are no alarms (see Liebert CRV
system screen, Figure 56).
18. W Models Only: Verify the water flow is adequate.
19. W Models Only: For closed circuit units, ensure that the water pump starts when the
compressor starts.
73 Liebert® CRV™
Startup
Checks to Perform after Startup

Once the system is operating under load, check the various components, as follows:
1. Verify that the fans are operating properly.
2. Ensure that the temperature and relative humidity are being controlled, and that the humidifier
(optional) and heating steps (optional) operate when required.
3. Ensure that the compressor operates when required.
4. Ensure that the fan operation controller on the external condenser/drycooler (if fitted) is
calibrated correctly, and that it controls the fan operation.
5. Record all of the following on the warranty inspection form:
a. All component voltages and current draws
b. All air / water temperatures indoor and outdoor
c. All refrigerant and water / glycol pressures,
d. All levels of refrigerant and oil in sight glasses
e. Record refrigerant pressure switch settings and operating pressures
f. Record superheat and sub-cooling.
10.2 Automatic Restart

The Liebert CRV may be set up through the Liebert iCOM to automatically restart on the return of
power after a supply power interruption.
To avoid an automatic cold restart of the compressor if a power interruption of several hours is
expected, stop the unit before the blackout. After power returns, allow the compressor to preheat
before restarting the unit.
Figure 47 Refrigerant line components—600mm (24") models

Liquid Receiver Solenoid Valve Sight Glass
Relief Valve
Thermostatic
expansion
valve
Filter
Dryer
Filter
Dryer
Inlet
Schrader
Valve
Liebert® CRV™ 74
Startup
Figure 48 Refrigerant line components—300mm (12") DX models
Thermostatic
expansion
valve
Sight
Glass
Pressure
Transducer
Solenoid
Valve
Pressure
Transducer
75 Liebert® CRV™
Startup
10.3 Chilled Water Valve: Chilled Water 600mm (24") Models

The Liebert 600mm (24") chilled water unit comes with a two-way or three-way valve (see
Figure 17).
The valve controls the chilled water flow and operates as follows:
• When the valve is fully open (i.e., maximum chilled water flow), the actuator slot is set to “1.”
• When the valve is closed (i.e., no chilled water flow), the actuator slot is set to “0.”
The valve running time is set to the value specified in the control manual.
NOTE
In the event of control system failure, the valve can be manually controlled with the ball valve
handle. It can be used to drive the actuator into any position between 0 and 1.
Figure 49 Position of the chilled water valve actuator (for 2- or 3-way valve)—600mm (24") units
Chilled Water
Valve Actuator
Water
Return
Piping
Water
Supply
Piping
10.4 Adjust Baffles to Direct Air Properly
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock and contact with high speed rotating fan blades. Can cause injury or
death.
Open all local and remote electric power supplies and verify with a voltmeter that power is Off
and verify that all fan blades have stopped rotating before working within the unit cabinet
and electric connection enclosures.
Ensure that the Liebert CRV is shut down and verify with a voltmeter that electric power has
been disconnected before beginning any work on the unit.
The Liebert CRV has been equipped with an adjustable, modular supply air baffle system. The baffles
should be adjusted prior to startup to direct air toward the racks the cooling unit is intended to
condition. Ideally, these should be the same racks the cooling unit is pulling hot air from. The baffles
can be readjusted at any time as cooling needs change.
Liebert® CRV™ 76
Startup
The Liebert CRV is shipped with the baffles in an alternating pattern to direct cold air left and right.
This configuration should be used when the cooling unit is located between racks. If a Liebert CRV is
installed at the end of a row, all the baffles should be adjusted to blow air down the cold-aisle, toward
the racks. The baffle segments at the top of the panel will direct more air than the segments at the
bottom. The supply air will travel the furthest when all baffle segments are pointed in the same
direction, left or right.
10.4.1 Adjust Baffles on 600mm (24") Models

To adjust the baffles on 600mm (24") models:
1. Open the door containing the Liebert iCOM® display.
2. Remove the two screws holding a baffle panel segment in place.
3. Slide out the baffle segment.
4. There is one screw on each side of the baffle, as shown in Figure 50. Remove the screws and
rotate the baffle segment around its horizontal axis to change the airflow direction.
5. Reinsert the baffle segment and reinstall the screws.
Figure 50 Adjust the baffles to ensure correct airflow direction—600mm (24") models
Inside view, showing
baffle removal for changing
2. Remove two bolts. airflow direction.
1. Open Liebert
CRV Display Door.
3. Tilt and lift

baffle panel.
For proper operation, the baffles

must be installed so the discharge DPN001863
air points up. Pg. 1, Rev. 2
77 Liebert® CRV™
Startup
10.4.2 Adjust Baffles on 300mm (12") Models

To adjust the baffles on 300mm (12") models:
NOTE
The air baffles on 300mm (12") units may be changed to direct air either right or left.
1. Shut down the Liebert CRV.
2. Open the door containing the Liebert iCOM® display.
3. Remove the screws that secure the baffle panel in place.
Each panel is secured with four screws, two on each side.
4. Slide out the baffle panel.
5. Rotate the baffle panel around its horizontal axis to change the airflow direction.
6. Reinsert the baffle panel.
7. Repeat for all baffles to be changed.
8. Reinstall the screws in the metal brace.
Figure 51 Adjust the baffles to ensure correct airflow direction—300mm (24") models
Remove screws, rotate baffles to desired
airflow direction. Reinstall screws.
Open
Door
Each arrow represents

a baffle segment. Unit
ships with baffles pointing
in alternating directions.
Step 3
Step 6
B
Step 4
Step 5 DPN002809
Inside View Rev. 1
Liebert® CRV™ 78
Startup
10.4.3 Adjust Blocker Plate—600mm (24") models

A blocker plate inside the display door should also be adjusted to direct air toward the racks the
Liebert CRV is intended to condition. The blocker plate can be installed on the left or right side of the
display door, or it can be removed to discharge air left and right.
Figure 52 Adjust air-blocking plate—600mm (24") models
Perforated Supply Air Blocker Installed

Air Opening Over Perforation
Attachment
Screws
INSIDE DISPLAY DOOR FRONT VIEW

DPN001863
Pg. 2, Rev. 2
To adjust the air blocker:
1. Remove the three screws that attach the blocker plate to the display door.
2. Reattach the blocker plate to the other side of the display door or to remove it.
79 Liebert® CRV™
Liebert iCOM® Control
11.0 LIEBERT ICOM® CONTROL

The Liebert CRV is equipped with the most-advanced Liebert iCOM control system. The large Liebert
iCOM display is standard on the Liebert CRV.
Each Liebert CRV contains a return air temperature and humidity sensor, supply air temperature
sensor and three remote rack sensors. Up to an additional seven remote rack sensors can be added to
the sensor network. Each rack sensor takes two temperature readings and reports either the average
or the maximum temperature of the two sensors.
The 2T rack temperature sensors provide feedback to the cooling unit about the condition of the air
entering the server racks. This information allows the Liebert CRV to ensure it is providing just
enough cold air to each rack, virtually eliminating hot spots. Overcooling and excessive airflow are
avoided, greatly reducing unnecessary energy consumption.
Each Liebert CRV includes three 2T rack temperature sensors to monitor three racks. A total of ten
2T temperature sensors can be connected to each cooling unit to monitor every rack a Liebert CRV is
protecting. When multiple cooling units are connected in a Unit-to-Unit Liebert iCOM control
network, all sensor data is shared to optimize their performance as a system.
2T rack sensors can also be initially installed on empty racks reserved for future growth with the
control set to ignore these sensor readings. The extra 2T temperature sensor readings can also be
displayed on the local display and reported remotely for monitoring purposes only without the
readings affecting unit operation. This function provides users with a built-in mini-monitoring
system.
NOTE
Not all the commands and functions referred to in the Liebert iCOM sections of this document
will be available on all types of Liebert CRV units.
For instance, commands and functions relating to chilled water will not have a corresponding
feature in DX units.
Liebert® CRV™ 80
Table 31 Keyboard icons and functions

Icon Key Name Function
On/Off Key Controls the operational state of the cooling unit.
Alarm Key Silences an alarm.
? Help Key Accesses integrated Help menus.
ESC ESCape Key Returns to the previous display view.
Enter Key Confirms all selections and selects icons or text.
Increase Key
Moves upward in a menu or increases the value of a selected parameter.
(Up Arrow)
Decrease Key
Moves downward in a menu or reduces the value of a selected parameter.
(Down Arrow)
Left and Right

Navigates through text and sections of the display.
Arrow Keys
Blinking Red—Active, unacknowledged alarm exists

Upper LED
Solid Red—Active, acknowledged alarm exists
Solid Amber—Power is available to the unit; unit is NOT operating.

Blinking Amber / Green—The unit is in stand-by mode.
Lower LED
Green—Unit is operating with no alarms
Figure 53 Liebert iCOM® default screen symbols
Fan Cooling Maintenance
Electric Heat Dehumidification Humidification
81 Liebert® CRV™
11.1 Control Interface

When the buttons on the Liebert iCOM® control have not been pressed for a short period, the display
backlight turns Off. Pressing any key will wake up the screen and display the Status menu of the last
cooling unit viewed. The Status menu will show the cooling unit’s operational mode(s), return air
temperature and humidity readings, temperature and humidity setpoints and any active alarms.
Whether the cooling unit is in a Liebert iCOM U2U network or is a stand-alone unit, the Status menu
will display only that cooling unit’s information. Any large display connected to a network can be used
to view any cooling unit on the network or to show an average view of the entire system of cooling
units (the system view is obtained by pressing the Right and Left arrow key from the unit view). The
unit information being viewed is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen (see Figure 57 for
an example).
11.1.1 Navigating Through the Liebert iCOM Menus

User Menus
The Liebert iCOM shows icons and text for monitoring and controlling Liebert cooling units or
network of cooling units. The control is broken out into three major menus. User, Service and
Advanced menus.
The User menu contains the most frequently used features, settings and status information. See
Figure 54 for a menu overview.
Figure 54 User menu icons and descriptions
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
9 3 1234 h
ACTIVE
SET 6
ALARMS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
Setpoints Spare Part List Event Log Graphics View Network Set Alarms
View and Displays the Contains last Displays temperature Shows status of all Allows enable, disable
change various part 400 events and humidity graphs connected units and settings for alarms
temperature numbers of the
and humidity components/par
setpoints ts in the cooling
unit
! 12
9 3 1234h
ACTIVE SET 6
ALARMS
Sensor Data Active Alarms Display Setup Total Run Hours Service Contact Info Condenser Timer
Shows readings Allows the user Change settings Records the run time Contains key contact Contains key
of standard and to view all for display: of all components and information for local information about the
optional current active language, time, allows setting service, including Liebert MC Condenser
sensors alarms simple or of limits on run time names and phone operation
graphic view numbers
Liebert® CRV™ 82
NOTE
The Liebert iCOM control has three main menus: User, Service and Advanced. Menu settings
may be viewed without a password, but changing settings requires a password. If a password
is required, Liebert iCOM shows a prompt to enter the password. The password for the User
menu is 1490. The password for the Service menu is 5010.
See 11.3.1 Entering a Password for entering password.
Service Menus
The Service menu contains settings and features used to set up unit communication and for unit
maintenance. Figure 55 below provides an overview of the menu.
Figure 55 Service menu icons
Service Menu
password: 5010
Table 32 Service menu icons

Icon Name Description
°C / °F
SET
% RH ALARMS
WELLNESS
SET
SERVICE
Setpoints Unit Diary Standby Settings/ Maintenance / Diagnostics/ Set Alarms
To view and Shows all entered Lead-Lag Wellness Settings Service Mode Allows enable,
change program changes Allows lead/lag Allows setting Allows disable and
temperature and and maintenance setup when maintenance troubleshooting, settings for
humidity setpoints performed on the multiple units are interval reminder, manual mode, alarms
unit. connected maintenance read analog and
message, number digital inputs
of unit starts and
stops and time
since last
maintenance
NETWORK
SET
UP RACK
+/- VIEW
Sensor System/Network Options Setup Rack Setup Service Humidifier

Calibration/ Setup Allows setup of Label racks, Contact Info Settings
Setup Allows setup and component establish settings Contains key Change
Allows calibration U2U communication operation for sensors contact Humidifier
of sensors for multiple units information for settings
local service,
including names
and phone
numbers
NOTE
Menu settings may be viewed without a password, but changing settings requires a password.
If a password is required, the Liebert iCOM shows a prompt to enter the password. The
password for the User menu is 1490. The password for the Service menu is 5010. For details on
entering a password, see 11.3.1 Entering a Password.
83 Liebert® CRV™
Advanced Menus
Advanced menus contains factory settings that do not typically require changes in the field. Contact
the factory with any questions about items in the Advanced menus.
11.1.2 Accessing Submenus

To access the User, Service or Advanced menu, press the Enter or Down arrow key from the system
view. The system view will be indicated in the upper left corner of the screen. See Figure 56. The
unit view is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen. See Figure 55. The user will see the
unit view in most cases. The control defaults to the unit view if power is cycled to the disconnect or the
user escapes from a submenu (User, Service or Advanced). Pressing the Down arrow or Enter key
from the unit view allows the user to enter the User menus.
From the user menu, the Service and Advanced Menu can be accessed by pressing the Right arrow
key. The menu name will be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen. Using the Left arrow
key returns to the previous menu.
Figure 56 System View screen
Fan Speed
Cooling Capacity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Summary of Rack
Sensor Reading
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
Figure 57 Unit View screen
Return Air Temperature Return Air Unit Being Viewed

and Humidity Temperature and
Summary of Rack
Sensor Reading
Supply Temperature
and Humidity Fan Speed
Cooling Capacity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
Liebert® CRV™ 84
Figure 58 Main screens, User, Service and Advanced

User Display Service Display Advanced Display
11.1.3 Submenus
While viewing the menu you wish to access (User, Service or Advanced), press the Enter key to
highlight the first icon. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the icons. Each icon is described in
the lower portion of the screen to help navigate the control. With the desired icon highlighted, press
the Enter key to enter that submenu. Once in a submenu, a list of parameters will be displayed.
The menu tree for a networked large display shows the Liebert iCOM® control menus for a
stand-alone large display and for a networked large display, respectively.
The Up and Down arrow keys may be used to scroll through the parameters page-by-page if the
submenu has ore than one page. To scroll item-by-item, press the Enter key and use the Up and Down
arrow keys. If multiple units are connected in a Liebert iCOM U2U network, pressing the Right arrow
key brings up information from other units within the group. The unit view is indicated in the upper
right corner of the screen whenever a submenu is being viewed. Pressing the ESC key from a
submenu will bring up the user menu.
NOTE
Settings are readable without a password, but changing settings requires a password.
85 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 59 Screen transition
ESC
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
6
ALARMS SET
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
Liebert® CRV™ 86
Figure 60 Menu tree—Stand-alone units or units not in a network

Status Menu - System View
Status Menu - Unit View
User Menu Unit 1 Service Menu Unit 1 Advanced Menu Unit 1

Setpoints Setpoints Compressor Info
Spare Parts List Unit Diary MBV Settings
Event Log Standby Settings/Lead-Lag Change Passwords
Graphics Maintenance/Wellness Settings Runtime Monitoring
View Network Diagnostics/Service Mode Event Override
Set Alarms Set Alarms Global Condenser
Sensor Data Sensor/Calibration Setup
Active Alarms System Network Setup
Display Setup Options Setup
Total Run Hours Rack Setup
Service Contact Info Service Contact Info
Condenser Timer Humidifier Settings
87 Liebert® CRV™
11.1.4 Viewing Multiple Units with a Networked Large Display

When you first wake up the control, the unit view is display, as indicated by the unit name in the
upper right corner. Pressing the Up arrow from any of the unit view displays the system view
(Figure 61). The system view shows items such as average call for cooling and space temperatures of
all the connected units in the U2U group. To view a specific unit on the network from the system
view, press either the Enter key, ESC key or Down arrow key. When this is done, the word System
appears in the top left of the screen. The Left and Right arrow keys toggles through the various units
on the network. To go back to the System view from any unit view, press the Up arrow
Figure 61 Liebert CRV system screen
Fan Speed
Cooling Capacity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Summary of Rack
Sensor Reading
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
SYSTEM MENU
Unit Name
Return Air Temperature
and Humidity
Summary of Rack
Sensor Reading
Supply Temperature Cooling Capacity

Fan Speed
and Humidity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
MAIN MENU
Liebert® CRV™ 88
Figure 62 Menu tree—Liebert CRV’s in a network

Status Menu - System View
Status Menu - Unit View Status Menu - Unit View

Unit 1 Units 2, 3, ...
User Menu User Menu Advanced Menu

Unit 1 Unit 1 Unit 1
Password Password Password
Setpoints Setpoints Compressor Info
Spare Parts List Unit Diary MBV Settings
Event Log Standby Settings/Lead-Lag Change Passwords
Graphics Maintenance/Wellness Settings Runtime Monitoring
View Network Diagnostics/Service Mode Event Override
Set Alarms Set Alarms Global Condenser
Sensor Data Sensor/Calibration/Setup
Active Alarms System/Network Setup
Display Setup Options Setup
Total Run Hours Rack Setup
Service Contact Info Service Contact Info
Condenser Timer Humidifier Settings
89 Liebert® CRV™
11.2 Liebert iCOM Display Readout

The Liebert iCOM for the Liebert CRV supports multiple unit screen layouts. These screen layouts
are configured on line U408 of the user menus, Display Setup icon.
Figure 63 Display user menu - Display setup
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
9 3 1234 h
ACTIVE
SET 6
ALARMS
U408 Screen selections include:

• Unit View (factory default)
• Graphical Rack View [GDR View]
• Rack View
• CRV Simple
• CRV Graphical
The screens are a graphical representation of the Liebert CRV, selectable to show unit operation with
or without rack sensors, unit operation with a rack sensor summary, historical temperature and
humidity trending. The Liebert CRV display will always revert to the Unit Screen.
The following screens selections are for user preference. The rack view should be used only when
remote rack sensors are connected.
The System screen can be accessed by pressing the Up arrow key when the Unit screen is displayed.
The System screen shows the fan speed and cooling capacity averages of all connected units. The
Supply, Return and Remote Rack sensors of all connected units are also displayed showing the
average, maximum and minimum of all connected sensors.
Liebert® CRV™ 90
Figure 64 Liebert iCOM menu components for Liebert CRV
Return Air Temperature

and Humidity
Summary of Rack
Sensor Reading
Supply Temperature
and Humidity Fan Speed
Cooling Capacity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
UNIT VIEW
(Default)
Historical Supply Air

Temperature Graph
Historical Supply Air

Humidity Graph
GDR VIEW
Humidification
Individual Rack Sensor

Temperatures.
Graphs are empty at
68°F (20°C) and full at
77°F (25°C).
RACK VIEW
91 Liebert® CRV™
Figure 65 Liebert iCOM® menu components for Liebert CRV
Supply Air Temperature

and Humidity
Fan Speed
Next Recommended
Cooling Capacity Maintenance Date
Last Two Events,

Warnings or Alarms
SIMPLE DISPLAY
Supply Temperature
and Humidity
Fan Speed
Cooling Capacity
Next Recommended
Maintenance Date
Last Two Events,
Warnings or Alarms
GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
Liebert® CRV™ 92
11.3 Liebert CRV Operation—Liebert iCOM Control

The Liebert iCOM on the Liebert CRV leaves the factory with the fan speed and cooling capacity
controlled by the supply air sensor. This control mode ensures that that the Liebert CRV is delivering
precise cooling to the cold aisle.
Installing the remote rack sensors allows the fan speed and the cooling capacity to be decoupled. This
means that the fan speed can be controlled independently of the cooling capacity. In this
configuration, the Liebert CRV can control the discharge temperature of the unit by modulating
cooling capacity based on the supply sensor and use the remote rack sensors to ensure that cool air is
being delivered to the racks’ inlet. Using the supply and remote rack sensors in this decoupled mode
is the preferred method for controlling the Liebert CRV in a hot / cold aisle configuration. In addition
to this configuration, Emerson has provided additional flexibility for other applications shown in
Table 33.
In the Setpoint screen, the controlling temperature sensor (S102) can be set to either Supply, Return
or Remote. As the selection is changed from one sensor to another, the setpoint is displayed next to
the corresponding sensor on the illustration, showing the sensors placement in relation to the
Liebert CRV.
Figure 66 Service Menu - Setpoint screen
A password must be entered to change the setting.
93 Liebert® CRV™
11.3.1 Entering a Password

Changing the value of a parameter in a menu requires the password for that menu. Each menu—
User, Service and Advanced—has a unique password to prevent unauthorized changes.
The User menu password is 1490; the Service menu password is 5010.
NOTE
Entering the Service menu password permits access to both the User and Service menus;
changes can then be made to parameters in either level.
To enter a password:
1. Navigate to the menu that contains the parameter to be changed.
2. Select Password in the submenu by pressing the Enter key
3. Press the Enter key to move your cursor to the right side of the screen to select the question
marks.
4. Use the arrow keys to enter the numeral for the password's first digit (the Up arrow key moves
from 1 to the next digit).
5. Use the Right arrow key to move to the next question mark and repeat using the arrow keys to
enter the numerals in the password.
6. After entering the password, press Enter.
If the password is correct, the Actual Level, shown to the right of Password, will change from 0 to 1 or
2. The menu will remain locked at Level 0 if the password was incorrect.
NOTE
Returning to the Status menu will require re-entering a password to make changes.
Temperature and fan control sensor settings are based on user preference. The temperature and
fan control settings are made in the Service Menus, Setpoints (refer to Figure 63). Use
Table 33 and the steps below as a guideline.
Table 33 Controlling sensor settings

S103 Temperature Control Sensor
Supply Remote Sensor Return
Factory Default
Supply N/A N/A
(Coupled)
S125 Fan
Recommended
Control Sensor Remote Sensor (Coupled) N/A
(Decoupled)
Return (Decoupled) (Decoupled) (Coupled)
1. Set S103 Temperature Control Sensor to the desired sensor type.

2. Set S125 Fan Control Sensor to the desired sensor type.
3. Set the humidity setpoint to 45% with a 10 to 20% deadband.
This will control the moisture content well inside the AHSRAE standard.
4. Set S102 Temperature Setpoint to the desired value.
5. Adjust S125 Fan Delta as needed. If the control is running in coupled mode, per Table 33, S125
will be masked out. This is because the fan and temperature settings are the same and both will
be controlled by S102. If the unit is operating in a decoupled mode, S125 is used to establish the
fan setpoint. The fan delta works like this: (S102 Temperature Setpoint) + (S125 Fan Delta) = Fan
Control Setpoint. The fan control setpoint can be viewed in the User menus, Sensor Data, line
U303.
Liebert® CRV™ 94
Supply Control
If 75°F (24°C) server entering air temperature is desired at the rack inlet, the supply air must be
colder to account for any thermal pickup of the air as it flows to the cold aisle. If this does not achieve
the cold aisle temperature setpoint, then set the supply sensor setpoint lower. Continue adjusting the
supply sensor until the cold aisle temperature setpoint is achieved.
The supply temperature setpoint may require adjustment because it will be dependent on the
distance of the Liebert CRV to the racks being cooled. This temperature will also be dependent on
rack blanking panels, server population and whether the racks are in a containment system.
Controlling sensor settings shows the flexibility of the Liebert CRV and how the different sensor
configurations can be used to control the Liebert CRV fan speed and cooling capacity. See Table 33
for more information on the different coupled and decoupled modes available with the Liebert CRV.
11.3.2 Cooling
The cooling control of the Liebert CRV can be managed from any of the temperature sensors. See
Table 33 for applicable control sensor combinations. The Liebert CRV controls cooling output by
monitoring a temperature control sensor, set on line S103, compared to the user programmed
temperature setpoint on either line U202 or S202. The degree of cooling is determined by the
temperature control band.
The temperature control band is established using the following formula and control lines:
(S102 Temperature Setpoint) + (1/2(S105 Temperature Deadband) + (S106 Temperature Control Band)
As the temperature sensed by the temperature control sensor deviates from the setpoint on the
control band, cooling is staged On. S107 Cooling integration time works with the cooling control band
to maintain tight temperature control.
Figure 67 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Cooling
Emerson recommends using the supply temperature sensor to control the cooling capacity of the
Liebert CRV. The supply temperature is an accurate representation of the actual heat rejection the
Liebert CRV needs to perform at an optimal level. A chilled water Liebert CRV will modulate the
cooling capacity from 0% - 100% and the DX version of the Liebert CRV will modulate the cooling
capacity of the unit from 10% -100% compressor capacity.
To avoid short-cycling the compressor during room heat load changes, the Liebert CRV will not
deactivate the compressor until the air temperature is below 150% of temperature control band.
95 Liebert® CRV™
11.3.3 Fan Speed

The heating control is active only when the unit is in dehumidification mode. The reheats will begin
activation when the control temperature has dropped to -66% of the control’s proportional band and
will deactivate when the temperature setpoint has been reached. The heating proportional band is
established using the following formula and control lines:
S102 Temperature Setpoint + (1/2 * S105 Temperature Deadband) + S108 Heating Proportional Band = heating
control band.
S109 Heating integration time works with the heating control band to stage reheat and maintain
tight temperature control. The items that make up the heating control band can be viewed and
adjusted in the Service menus, Setpoints.
Figure 68 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Fan Speed
11.3.4 Air Flow

The Liebert CRV's airflow can be controlled manually or dynamically by temperature sensors.
Manual Fan Control: Cooling off supply, remote, or return sensor are permitted in manual fan
speed control. Manual control of the Liebert CRV’s fan speed can be achieve in two ways:
• Manually setting the fixed speed at the local display OR
• Remote monitoring
To control the fan manually using either method, locate Service menus, Setpoints, line S124 Fan
Control Type. The factory default is Auto with an alternative selection of Manual. S124 must be set
as Manual before a manual fan setpoint point can be programmed. With the fan control type set for
Manual, the fan speed may be set from 50% to 100% at the local display using S130 Fan Speed
Manual Setpoint. A Liebert IntelliSlot® card or other Liebert site monitoring integration is required
for remote fan control.Visit www.Liebert.com for more information about Liebert monitoring
products. A list of monitoring points is available in document SL-28170 (Liebert IntelliSlot® Modbus
485, Modbus IP and BACnet IP). This document can also be obtained by visiting www.Liebert.com
Figure 69 Service Menu Setpoint screen for Airflow
Liebert® CRV™ 96
Temperature Sensor Control: Fan temperature control uses the factory-equipped return, supply or
remote sensors. See Table 33 for applicable control sensor combinations. When operating the fan in
coupled mode, the fan speed follows the call for cooling to reach the temperature setpoint. When the
fans are operating in a decoupled mode, the fans are ramped following the fan control band to achieve
the fan setpoint. The fan setpoint is a calculated value found on line U303 of the User menus, Sensor
Data. U303 is established by lines located in Service menus, Setpoints.
Here (S102 Temperature Setpoint) + (S125 Fan Delta) = Fan control setpoint. As the temperature
sensed at the fan control sensor (S125) deviates from setpoint (U303), the fan modulates between
50 and 100% according to the fan control band. Fan speed increases as the temperature deviates
further from setpoint. The inverse happens as the controlled temperature gets closer to setpoint. The
fan control band is established by using the following formula and control lines:
(U303 Fan Setpoint) + (S128 Fan Control Band)
S129 Fan speed integration time works with the fan control band to slowly speed or slow down the fan
to maintain tight fan control.
Emerson recommends controlling the fan speed using the remote rack temperature sensors. The
remote rack sensors are an accurate representation of the delivery of the Liebert CRV’s discharge air
and help ensure that cold aisle temperature is maintained. The Liebert iCOM will ramp fan speed to
100% during a call for reheat or humidification. On DX models of the Liebert CRV, a unique freeze
protection algorithm will increase fan speed if the compressor pressure gets too low. This feature
increases system reliability and helps to provide partial cooling if a low side refrigerant issue occurs.
In a single fan fails, the Liebert CRV will ramp the remaining operating fan to 110% of its rated
output to compensate for the loss of airflow. In addition, an alarm will report which fan failed.
11.3.5 Humidification
The Liebert CRV’s humidification is activated when the measured temperature and humidity sensor
has been calculated to exceed the corresponding dew point setpoint. The dew point setpoint is
calculated based on the temperature and humidity of the sensor set to control the control setpoint and
relative humidity.
Figure 70 Service menu setpoint screen for humidification
Example: Temperature Setpoint 72°F / Humidity Setpoint 50% = 52°F Dew Point
NOTE
The Liebert iCOM control monitors the condition of the air discharging from the unit to protect
neighboring electronic equipment. Liebert iCOM will prevent the humidifier from activating if
the discharge air is near its saturation point. This protects against discharging fog from the
unit or condensation forming on the unit’s supply air baffles. This protection mode is activated
when the supply sensor reading is below 53°F (11.7°C) or above 55% relative humidity. When
this condition is met, a message will display showing “humidifier” suspended.
The status of the humidifier lockout can be viewed in the Service/Diagnostics menu.
These protections do not apply to the external humidifier output.
97 Liebert® CRV™
11.4 Liebert iCOM User Menu Screens

User menus report general cooling unit operations and status. The user menu password is 1490. To
review the full User Menu, refer to Figure 54.
The User menu parameter tables in this document may differ from the display on some cooling units.
The Liebert iCOM functions with several Liebert Thermal Management units, each with its own set
of controls. In addition, the Liebert iCOM firmware is being updated constantly. As a result, the User
menu parameter tables in this manual may differ from the display on a cooling unit. Check
www.liebert.com for the latest Liebert iCOM user manual updates.
Setpoints Parameters
Figure 71 User Menus-Setpoints parameters screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
U102 Controlling Sensor—Allows the user to select which sensor will be used to determine the
amount of cooling needed. This parameter can select only a single sensor for both the temperature
and fan speed control. Use the Service / Setpoints menu to decouple the operation of fan speed to the
remote sensors and the cooling capacity to the supply sensor.
U103 Temperature Setpoint—Allows selecting a temperature that the cooling unit will maintain
by applying cooling and or reheats.
U104 Humidity Setpoint—Allows selecting a humidity that the cooling unit will maintain by
removing or adding moisture to the air.
Spare Parts List

Spare Parts—The spare parts lists contains a detailed description and part number that can be used
to order parts for the unit. These part numbers are specific to each model and option installed on the
unit.
Liebert® CRV™ 98
Figure 72 User menus—Spare Parts screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
For more information regarding parts or part ordering, please call Liebert’s national parts help desk
at (800) 543-2778.
Event Log
Event Log—The event log displays all events and actions that have been generated by the unit.
When multiple units are networked the event log shows results for the whole system. Each event
shows the unit that generated the alarm, time and date stamp, a description and the event type
Figure 73 User menus-Event log screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
The event log contains the last 400 events generated by the unit. Events include such occurrences as
unit On/Off commands, alarms, warnings and messages. The event log has two views, a system view
and a unit view. When the event log is first entered, the system view is displayed. The system view
shows a list of events that have occurred at the unit and other units if configured in a U2U network.
Pressing the Right arrow while viewing the event log for the system view allows the user to see
unit-specific events. The unit name and number will appear in the upper right corner for the unit
selected. Each event shows the unit that generated the alarm, time and date stamp, a description and
the event type. As new events are stored in the log, older events are pushed further down the list.
Once the event log reaches 400 events, the oldest events are erased as new events are stored.
99 Liebert® CRV™
View Network
View Network—The view network screen provides an overview of the Liebert iCOM® network and a
status of each unit. This screen will provide the unit’s name. If no name is given, only the unit
number will be displayed.
Figure 74 User menus-Network screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
Sensor Data
Figure 75 User menus-Sensor data parameters screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
Sensor Data: Chilled Water Models Sensor Data: DX Models
Liebert® CRV™ 100

U301 Temperature Setpoint—Shows the cooling setpoint, which is the setpoint used to drive the
cooling capacity. This parameter will automatically change based on which sensor is used for control
(Return, Supply or Remote sensor).
U302 Actual Control Temperature—The temperature reading of the actual sensor that is
referenced to U301. This parameter automatically changes based on the control sensor setting.
U303 Fan Setpoint—Defines the fan speed setpoint. This value is not shown when a single sensor
(Coupled Mode) is used to control cooling capacity and fan speed. See Figure 57. Sensor Data for the
Chilled water is set for coupled and the Fan Setpoint is not shown. When the fan control sensor is
decoupled from the temperature control sensor, the parameter is calculated by adding the
temperature setpoint and the fan speed delta in the Service / Setpoints menu.
U304 Actual Fan Control Temp—The temperature reading of the actual sensor that is referenced
to U303. This parameter automatically changes based on the control sensor settings (Auto or
De-coupled).
U305 Humidity Setpoint—Allows selecting a humidity that the cooling unit will maintain by
removing or adding moisture to the air. This parameter is adjustable from 20-55%. The default
setting is 45%.
U306 Actual Return Humidity—The return relative humidity reading of the return sensor.
U307 Actual Supply Humidity—The calculated relative humidity of the supply sensor based on the
actual return humidity reading. This value is calculated by using a reverse look up algorithm based
on dew point.
U308 Actual CW Temperature—The actual chilled water supply temperature being delivered to
the unit.
U309 DigiScroll 1 Temperature—When digital scroll compressors are installed in the unit, then
the actual digital scroll number 1 head temperature will be shown.
Active Alarms
Active Alarms—Permits viewing all current, active alarms.
Figure 76 User menus—Sensor data parameters screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
101 Liebert® CRV™

Display Setup
Figure 77 User menus—Display setup parameters screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
U401 Language—Sets the language on the display. When this parameter is changed, all menu
parameters will be converted to the selected language.
U402 Date—Sets the internal date of the unit. If this unit is connected to other units with the
unit-to-unit network connection. All units will reflect the last date set.
U403 Time—Sets the internal time of the unit. If this unit is connected to other units with the
unit-to-unit network connection. All units will reflect the last time set.
U404 Temperature Indication—Selects the actual and setpoint temperature indication. Selecting
C will set the unit to display in Celsius; selecting F will set the unit to display in Fahrenheit.
U405 Display Contrast—Sets the contrast of the display to adjust for different viewing angles, low
light and bright light conditions. As the display ages the contrast may need to be adjusted for better
viewing clarity.
U406 Buzzer Frequency—Sets the audible noise frequency of the built-in buzzer. When adjusting
the buzzer frequency the buzzer will sound allowing you to select a frequency that is easily detected
when an alarm occurs.
U407 Backlite Off After—Controls the length of time that the backlight remains active when the
control is unused. When the buttons on the front display have not been pressed for the time selected
in this parameter the backlight will turn Off, extending the life of the display and saving energy.
U408 Screen—Multiple screen layouts exist for the Liebert CRV, including Rack View and Trends to
be monitoring on the main display. Views include a Unit View with or Without Sensors, Rack View
and Graphical Data Record View.
U409 Display Colors—Selects the background color. Inverted sets the display to show white text
with blue background and Normal sets a white background with blue text.
U410 Date Format—Changes the month, day and year arrangement shown on the front display and
on event time stamps.
Total Run Hours

Each parameter shows the actual hours the component has operated and the maximum time the
component can operate before the next maintenance.

Figure 78 User menus—Total run hours parameters screen
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
User-Condenser Timer Menu Screens

This menu is applicable to Liebert CRV DX units coupled to a Liebert MC outdoor condenser
connected through CANbus communication.
Figure 79 User menus—Condenser timer screen-page 1
USER MENUS
°C / °F
EVENT SET
% RH LOG ALARMS
SET
! 12
ACTIVE 9 3 1234 h
SET 6
ALARMS
U802 Low Noise Timer Enabled—Sets the low noise operations of the condenser fan. When the
parameter is set to YES, the low noise operation is selected. When set to NO, the low noise will be
disabled even if a schedule is set below.
U803 Noise Reduction On—Lists the day(s) that the low noise feature can be scheduled if U802 is
set to YES.
NOTE
The low noise feature will be overridden if a high pressure condition occurs. This is a
safeguard to ensure optimal control of the conditioned space.
U804 Whole Days—Selects the whole day(s) low noise operations will be available for the condenser
fan. When the parameter is set to YES, the low noise operation is selected for the whole day. When
set to NO the low noise will be disabled.
NOTE
Coordinate fan reversal time and date with unit Off conditions where applicable. If the
compressor is in operation and/or the fan is in a low noise operation, the request to reverse the
fans will be ignored. This is intended to prevent high-pressure condition.

U805 interval Days—Selects the interval day(s) low noise operations will be available for the
condenser fan. When the parameter is set to YES the low noise operation is selected. When set to NO
the low noise will be disabled even if an interval time is set below.
U806 Interval From—Selects the time of day that the low noise feature will be enabled between
00:00 and 24:00.
U807 Operating Mode (0=LN, 100=HE)—The first value represents the fan speed during low noise
operation. The second value represents the fan speed during normal or high efficiency operation. The
first value is linked to U818 and the second to U819. An example of low noise programming and how
the lines function together is provided on page 105. The selectable ranges for LN and HE is 0-100%.
Also, a read-only column is available to show the status of the low noise selection. The status will be
shown as:
• 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active-Interval
• 2 = Active-Whole Day
Figure 80 User menus—Condenser timer screen-page 2
U814 Fan Reversal Every x Days—Selection defines the numbers of days between fan reversals.
This parameter is adjustable from 1-100 days. The default set value is 0 days = OFF.
NOTE
If the compressor is in operation and/or the fan is in a low noise operation the request to
reverse the fans will be ignored. Fan reversal will resume when the next reversal time request is
made. This is safeguard to prevent a high pressure condition. Coordinate fan reversal time and
date with unit off conditions where applicable.
U815 Reverse Fan At:—Defines what time the fan reversal will be performed in 00:00 to 24:00.
U816 Reversal Duration—Defines the length of time the fan(s) will be operated in reverse. This
parameter is adjustable from 0-999 seconds. The default set value is 60 seconds.
U817 Reverse Fans Now—Performs a rotation when parameter is set to YES. When selection is set
to YES, the parameter will automatically change back to NO when the timer, U816, has elapsed.
NOTE
If the compressor is in operation and/or the fan is in a low noise operation the request to
reverse the fans will be ignored. When the conditions above are met to reverse the fans the
control will perform a reversal.
U818 Max Speed at OpMode 0 (Low Noise)—This line is linked to U807 0=LN column and defines
the maximum speed during Low Noise operation.
U819 Max Speed at OpMode 100 (High Efficiency)—This line is linked to U807 100=HE column
and defines the maximum speed during normal or High Efficiency operation.

Example: The customer does not want fan speed to exceed 35% of the maximum speed at night.
U807 would be set for 0% / 100%
U818 = 35% (Max fan speed low noise)
U819 = 100% (Max fan speed during normal operation)
The settings above result in a 35% maximum speed when the timer is active (eg., a night) and
have the ability to run between 0 and 100% maximum speed of when the timer is inactive (normal
operation, during daytime).
U820 Current Max Speed—Shows the status of the actual maximum fan speed.
11.5 Liebert iCOM Service Menu Screens

Service menus allow customized settings for site operations. The password for service menu
parameters is 5010.
The Liebert iCOM firmware is being updated constantly. As a result, the Service menu parameter in
this manual may be different than what is shown on a cooling unit’s display. Check
www.liebert.com for the latest Liebert iCOM user manual updates.
Figure 81 Service menus—Setpoints parameters screen - Page 1
S102 Temperature Setpoint—Selects a temperature that the cooling unit will maintain by
applying cooling and or reheats. This parameter is adjustable from 45-104°F (7.2-40°C). The factory
default setting is 68°F (20.0°C).
S103 Temperature Control Sensor—Designates which sensor will drive the compressor capacity.
• Settings:
• Supply Sensor
• Remote Sensor
• Return Sensor
If S103 and S125 are set to equal values, this is called coupled. In that case, compressor capacity
and fanspeed work in parallel (based on one control output), driven by the same control
parameters.
If S103 and S125 are set to different values, this is called decoupled. In that case, the compressor
capacity and the fanspeed work on different control circuits, each with its own control parameters
and control outputs.
S104 Temperature Control Type—Selects the type of control the system will use to activate
cooling, heating, humidification and dehumidification. A detailed description of each control type can
be found in Supply Control on page 95.

S105 Temperature Deadband—This parameter can be set to avoid overshooting of the setpoint and
cycling between the reheats and cooling. The value entered into this field will be split in half by the
temperature setpoint. Example: If the temperature setpoint is 70°F (21.1°C) and a 4°F (2.2°C)
deadband is set, then no cooling will be activated until 72°F (22.2°C) and no heating will be activated
until 68°F (20°C) is reached.
S106 Cooling Proportional Band—Adjusts the activation points of compressor or chilled water
valve. The cooling proportional band adjusted the rate of change based on the actual sensor value’s
deviation from setpoint. The smaller this number, the faster the compressor valve will increase
capacity. Too small of a number may cause the unit to short cycle the compressor or excessively
reposition the valve.
S107 Cooling Integration—Cooling integration takes into consideration the time the actual
temperature has deviated from the setpoint. The longer this deviation exists, the more corrective
action the unit will use to achieve the setpoint.
S113 Humidity Setpoint—Selects a humidity that the cooling unit will maintain by removing or
adding moisture to the air. This parameter is adjustable from 20-55%. The factory default setting
from the factory is 45%.
This setting is automatically updated when S103 Controlling Sensor is changed.
• IF _S103 (TempSensTy) == 0 (Supply) THEN set = 45%
• IF _S103 (TempSensTy) == 1 (Remote) THEN set = 45%
• IF _S103 (TempSensTy) == 2 (Return) THEN set = 25%
S114 Humidity Control Type—Selects the humidity control calculation. It can be set to
“Proportional” or “PI” (proportional/integral) only. The Liebert CRV assumes the current humidity at
the control sensor by calculating the return air dew point, and then taking the temperature setpoint
of the selected cooling sensor (S103) as a reference to recalculate the humidity.
S115 Humidity Deadband—This parameter can be set to avoid overshooting of the setpoint and
cycling between humidification and dehumidification. The value in this field will be split in half by
the temperature setpoint. Example: If the humidity setpoint is 50% and a 4% deadband is set, then no
humidity control will be activated between 48% and 52%.
S116 Humidity Proportional Band—Adjusts (1- 25%) the activation points of the humidifier and
compressors based on the actual sensor values deviation from setpoint. The lower this value the faster
the compressors and humidifier will increase capacity. A value that is too small may cause the unit to
short cycle or overshoot setpoint.
S117 Humidity Integration Time—Adjusts the capacity of the unit based on time away from
setpoint (0 - 25 minutes) so that accurate humidity control can be maintained. This parameter is
active only when Control Type is set to “PI.”
S118 Dehum Proportional Band—Adjusts the activation points of dehumidification based on the
actual sensor values deviation from setpoint. The lower this number the faster the compressors and
humidifier will increase capacity. A value that is too small may cause the unit to short cycle or
overshoot its setpoint.

S119 Dehum Integration Time—Adjusts the capacity of the unit based on time away from setpoint
(0 - 25 minutes) so that accurate humidity control can be maintained. This parameter is active only
when the control type is set to “PI.”
S120 Dehum/Heat Low Limit 1—Sets the temperature at which the compressor will be deactivated
for dehumidification control. Example: If Low Limit 1 is set to 4°F (2.2°C) and the temperature setpoint
is 70°F (21.1°C), then dehumidification will turn Off at 66°F (18.8°C).
S121 Low Limit 1 Reset—The Low Limit is reset - when set to 2.0K, dehum will be allowed to
restart at 20.8°C (18.8 + 2, using the example in the manual). This parameter controls when the
temperature has increased enough to re-enable dehumidification.
S124 Fan Control Type—Sets how the fan speed will be controlled. Setting this parameter to Auto
mode=0 will allow the Liebert CRV to drive the fan based on the temperature sensor selected for
sensor control type. Setting this parameter to Manual mode=1 allows the Liebert CRV to be set to a
fixed fan speed either through the local display or through a building management system.
S125 Fan Control Sensor—Selects which sensor will drive the Liebert CRV fans when set to Auto
mode for the fan control type [0 = Supply Sensor, 1 = Remote Sensor or 2 = Return Sensor].
S126 Fan Regulation Type—Sets the fans’ control type. It can be set to 0 = Proportional control,
which will modulate the fans linearly based on the deviation from the setpoint. Also it can set to
1=Proportional integral control, which is also available and works in the same manner as the
temperature control integral term.
S127 Fan Delta—Sets the fanspeed setpoint. The delta accounts for the temperature rise from the
Supply Air Sensor and the Remote Rack sensors by adding the Fan Delta to the Temperature
Setpoint (S102). This eliminates the possibility of setting the remote rack temperature setpoint lower
than the supply temperature setpoint.
S128 Fan Speed Proportional Band—Adjusts the fans rate of change based on the actual sensor
values deviation from setpoint or the delta. The smaller this number the faster the fan will increase
its speed. Too small of a number may cause the fans to excessively reposition.
Note that the Fanspeed Speed Proportional Band parameter can be set to Auto and decoupled.
S129 Fan Speed Integration—Adjusts the fanspeed of the unit based on time away from setpoint.
The setting is applied only to decoupled modes (refer to Table 33).
NOTE
The fanspeed settings S126 to S129 apply only to decoupled modes. When coupled, all values
disappear and have no effect.
S130 Fan Speed Manual Setpoint—Sets the speed of the fans when the unit is placed into Manual
Fan Speed Control mode [0-100%].
S131 Fan Speed STD—Sets the maximum fan speed of the unit under normal operating
circumstances (0-100%).
S132 Fan Speed Min—Sets the lowest fan speed operation of the unit [0-100%].
S133 Fan Speed Dehum—Sets the fan speed the unit will operate at during a call for
dehumidification (0-100%). The fan speed will position to the highest requirement. If the call for fan
speed from the remote rack sensor is requesting more air volume than the Dehum fan speed, then the
fans will run at the remote sensor’s fan speed request.

S135 MIN at CFC for EC Fan—Provides an offset to the minimum fan speed at the minimum call
for cooling. When set to 0 / 100 the MIN speed is reached when the call for fan is at 0%; the STD speed
is reached when the call for fan reaches 100%.
For example, if the minimum is set to 20 and the standard is set to 90, the fan speed MIN is reached
earlier (the fan operates on lower speed compared to the calculated call for fan), and the STD speed is
reached faster when compared to the calculated call for fan.
S136 STD at CFC for EC Fan—Provides an offset to the minimum fan speed at the minimum call
for cooling. When set to 0 / 100, the MIN speed is reached when the call for fan is at 0%; the STD
speed is reached when the call for fan reaches 100%.
S137 High Temp Limit Approach—Sets the sensor that controls the fan speed maximum override.
This can be set to 0 = Disabled, 1 = Supply Sensor and 2 = Return Sensor.
NOTE
The Liebert CRV fans are oversized and can be used to help protect equipment in emergency
situations, such as high temperature and a single fan failure.
S138 High Temp Limit Approach at—Sets the temperature (0 - 10°F) when the units fan speed
can operate above the maximum speed.
Defines a temperature differential below the High Supply or Return Temp Limit where the fan speed
would increase from Fanspeed Setpoint STD to Fanspeed MAX, which is defined on _A146 Analog
Out 1 High Limit.
S144 Ball Valve Setpoint Offset—Adjusts the operating compressor discharge pressure (0 - 70 psi
[0.0 - 4.8 bar]) by changing the targeted range of control.
Unit Diary—Shows program changes and maintenance performed on the unit.The Unit Diary serves
as a note pad, where information can be added by an Emerson Network Power® Liebert Services
technician.

11.6 Service-Standby Settings Menu Screen

Figure 85 Service menus—Standby settings / lead-lag parameters screen
S502 Number of Standby Units—Selects the number of units that will be in Standby mode. When
a unit is in standby mode, the fan will be Off and no cooling will be provided.
S503 Rotation Frequency—Controls when a rotation will occur between the standby units and the
operating units within a network.
S504 Rotate at (hour)—Sets the hour of the rotation.
S504 Rotate at (minute)—Sets the minute of the rotation.
S505 Rotate by—Determines the number of positions to rotate by. Example: If there are six units in
a unit-to-unit network and Units 1, 3 and 5 are in standby and this parameter is set to 1 at the next
rotation, units 2, 4,and 6 will be placed in standby and units 1, 3 and 5 will begin operating.
S506 Perform one Rotation—Manually forces a single rotation between units.
S515 Cascade Units—Allows standby units to activate if the active units are unable to maintain the
room temperature. If Yes is selected, the cascade units can perform all functions when activated from
standby. This parameter can also be set for Cooling Only or Cool / Heat only.
Start all Standby Units by HT—Activates all units to cool when a High Temperature alarm occurs.
See Parameters for Next Maintenance Calculation on page 110 and 11.8 Service—
Diagnostics Menu Screens for details on these menus.

11.7 Service—Wellness Menu Screens

The next maintenance calculation, will help keep the cooling unit running at peak performance to
ensure minimum component stress and maximum reliability.
If the unit includes any of the following components, they are included in the calculation:
• Fan(s)
• Compressor 1
• Electric Heaters
• Humidifier
For each component, the next maintenance will be calculated from the following parameters:
• Standard service interval (1, 2 or 4 times a year) (to be set)
• Working hours (counted)
• Number of starts (counted)
• Average running time (calculated)
• Optimum number of starts per hour (to be set)
• Maximum number of starts per hour (to be set)
• Maximum bonus to enlarge time to next maintenance (to be set)
• Maximum penalty to reduce time to next maintenance (to be set)
11.7.1 Calculating Unit Wellness

The Liebert iCOM keeps tabs on the condition of a cooling unit, determining its condition and
projecting when service will be needed for the entire unit as well as for individual components. This
assists in scheduling maintenance calls and helps pinpoint components likely to require service.
Liebert iCOM displays a graphic for needed maintenance. It begins with the standard maintenance
interval—12 months, six months or three months—and adjusts that based on its calculation of
components’ condition.
To calculate a unit’s condition, the Liebert iCOM keeps a running total of component working hours
and the number of times it has been started. Liebert iCOM relates that data to the
optimum/maximum starts per hour. Accordingly, Liebert iCOM will increase or decrease the time
before the next service call will be needed.
The more frequently a component starts, the sooner it is likely to need maintenance. If, for example, a
unit’s fan runs continuously but it’s compressor starts and stops often, Liebert iCOM records that and
calls for maintenance based on the compressor’s wellness factor.
Alarms and warnings, such as clogged filters or high or low pressure, reduce the time until the next
maintenance to zero. If the alarm is cleared and reset, Liebert iCOM recalculates the unit’s condition.
It begins with the pre-alarm maintenance time and factors in the alarm.
Parameters for Next Maintenance Calculation

General Maintenance Settings
• Maintenance Frequency—Can be set as one to 12 months or to zero, which disables maintenance
calculation
• Maximum Bonus—Increases the time to next maintenance with the set value, if all components
run optimally (number of starts, average running time)
• Maximum Penalty value—Decreases the time to next maintenance with the set value, if some
components run in non-optimum way (number of starts, average running time)
• Last Maintenance—Date can be set from service-engineer; informational
• Service-Engineer—Name of the service engineer; editable
• Reset—Puts all counters of all components, such as (motor, compressors, heaters and humidifier),
at zero and starts a new maintenance calculation (reset to be done after maintenance)

Fans / Heaters / Humidifier Settings

• Number of starts and working hours are counted separately since the last maintenance. Total
working hours can be read in the standard working hours window (customer window).
• Average Working Hours is the calculation resulting from starts and working hours.
• Starts per Day Optimum is the number of starts considered optimum.
• Starts per Day Worst is the number of starts considered hunting (worst case).
• Number of Alarms counts the alarms between two service intervals.
• Actual Bonus is calculated from number of starts and average working time. Can be positive
(bonus) or negative (penalty). This value influences the time remaining to the next maintenance.
Compressor 1 Settings
• Number of starts and working hours are individually counted since the last maintenance. Total
working hours can be read in the standard working hours window (customer window).
• Average Working Hours is the calculation resulting from starts and working hours.
• Starts per Day Optimum is the number of starts considered as optimum.
• Starts per Day Worst is the number of starts considered as hunting (worst case).
• Number of HP Alarms counts the high-pressure alarms between two service intervals.
• Number of LP Alarms counts the low-pressure alarms between two service intervals.
• Number of TH Alarms counts the thermal protection alarms between two service intervals.
• Actual Bonus is calculated from number of starts and average working time. Can be positive
(bonus) or negative (penalty). This value influences the time remaining to the next maintenance.
Figure 86 Service menus—Wellness basic settings screen - Page 1
S002 Maintenance Frequency Per Year—Sets the number of expected maintenance visits in a
year.
S003 Max Bonus—Increases the time until the next maintenance cycle. A bonus should be assigned
when a service visit finds that all components are working optimally.
S004 Max Penalty—Decreases the time until the next maintenance cycle. A penalty should be used
when a service visit finds excessive wear on components.
S005 Last Maintenance—Set during a service call. It also shows other service personnel the date of
the last visit.
S006 Service Engineer—Provides a label for the service representative to list either the company
name or representative’s name.
S007 Confirm PM—Confirms that the service representative has completed the preventive
maintenance and sets the next maintenance date.
S008 Calculated Next Maintenance—Provides a date to when the next expected maintenance
should take place based on the last confirmed preventive maintenance, component starts, run hours
and the penalty / bonus currently set in the Liebert iCOM control.

Figure 87 Service menus—Wellness motor settings parameters screen - Page 2
S013 Number of Starts—Shows the number of starts for the unit’s fans.
S014 Run Hours—Shows the number of run hours for the unit’s fan.
S015 Average Run Time—Displays the average run time of the unit’s fan.
S016 Starts per Day Best—Displays the lowest number of starts in a rolling 24 hour period.
S017 Starts per Day Worst—Displays the highest number of starts in a rolling 24 hour period.
S018 Number of Alarms—Displays the number of alarms that have occurred with the unit’s fans.
S019 Actual Bonus—Displays the actual calculation of wellness for the unit’s fans. The unit will
always take the value from the worst component for the next maintenance indication.
Figure 88 Service menus—Wellness compressor 1 settings parameters screen - Page 3
S024 Number of Starts—Shows the number of starts for the unit’s compressor.
S025 Run Hours—Shows the number of run hours for the unit’s compressor.
S026 Average Run Time—Displays the average run time of the unit’s compressor.
S029 Number of HP Alarms—Displays the number of high pressure alarms that have occurred
with the unit’s compressor.
S030 Number of LP Alarms—Displays the number of low pressure alarms that have occurred with
the unit's compressor.
S031 Number of OL Alarms—Displays the number of overload alarms that have occurred with the
unit's compressor.
S032 Number of DS HT Alarms—Displays the number of Digital Scroll High Temperature alarms
that have occurred with the unit's compressor.
S033 Actual Bonus—Displays the actual calculation of wellness for the unit’s compressor. The unit
will always take the value from the worst component for the next maintenance indication.

Figure 89 Service menus—Wellness electric heater 1 settings parameters screen - Page 4
S035 Number of Starts—Shows the number of starts for the unit’s reheats.
S036 Run Hours—Shows the number of run hours for the unit’s reheats.
S037 Average Run Time—Displays the average run time of the unit's reheats.
S040 Number of HP Alarms—Displays the number of high pressure alarms that have occurred
with the unit’s reheats.
S041 Actual Bonus—Displays the actual calculation of wellness for the unit’s reheats. The unit will
always take the value from the worst component for the next maintenance indication.
Figure 90 Service menus—Wellness humidifier settings parameters screen - Page 5
S046 Number of Starts—Shows the number of starts for the unit’s humidifier.
S047 Run Hours—Shows the number of run hours for the unit’s humidifier.
S048 Average Run Time—Displays the average run time of the unit’s humidifier.
S051 Number of Alarms—Displays the number of high pressure alarms that have occurred with the
unit’s humidifier.
S052Actual Bonus—Displays the actual calculation of wellness for the unit’s humidifier. The unit
will always take the value from the worst component for the next maintenance indication.

11.8 Service—Diagnostics Menu Screens

Figure 91 Service menus—Diagnostics / service mode parameters screen - Page 1
Lines S302-S304, S308 and

S310 are not displayed on
chilled water models.
S302 HP 1 Alarm Code—Compressor 1 high pressure alarm code.

S303 LP 1 Alarm Code—Indicates which phase Compressor 1 is operating in. For more information,
refer to the Liebert iCOM Training and Service manual’s low pressure transducer flow chart.
S304 HT 1 Alarm Counter—Compressor 1 high temperature event alarm counter. If more than five
events in a rolling 4 hour period occur, then the compressor will be locked out.
S305 12h Dehum Counter—Is a counter that counts A136 Dehum Timer times out.
• If the Dehum Timer is used 3 times in any rolling 12 hour period Dehum needs to be disabled for
12 hours.
• A message is generated “Dehum Suspended 12hrs”).
The message can be disabled in the Service - Set Alarms menu.
• The counter resets to 0 on a power cycle and can be manually reset via Display.
• When Dehum is enabled again, a message is be generated “Dehum Resumed.” The message can
be disabled in the Service - Set Alarms menu.
S306 Low Supply Temperature Counter—It increases by 1 each time the low supply temperature
event is triggered.
S307Actual LP1 Pressure—Current refrigerant low pressure side reading in atmosphere for
Compressor 1.
S308 Actual HP1 Pressure—Current refrigerant high pressure side liquid reading in atmospheres
for Compressor 1. (This is available only on water-cooled units equipped with a motorized ball valve.)
Lines S315-S318 are

not displayed on
chilled water models.

S313 Manual Mode—Places the Liebert iCOM® control in manual mode. This is the initial setting is
necessary to activate any of the subsequent items. Manual Mode is used to check components and
operation of the unit for proper operation and performance.
To use Manual Mode enter the password, 5010, and select YES on line S313. With the exception
of Compressor Evacuate Mode, Manual Mode will time out after 30 minutes of inactivity. When
finished running components in Manual Mode, change line S313 back to NO. All the
corresponding components changed with Manual Mode enabled will go back to Normal. The unit
will resume operation as it was before Manual Mode was enabled. Safety routines, such as
overload alarms, high pressure lockout, etc., will prevent some features from being used. If an
alarm has been disabled but is active, some Manual Mode functions will not work.
S314 Motor(s)—Setting this option to On will start the main fan of the unit. The main fan must be
On before any of the following overrides can be activated. Compressor Evacuate Mode does not
require motor(s).
S315 Compressor 1—Turns on Compressor 1 and selects the mode of compressor operation. The
operation selections are RUN, EVACUATE and CHARGE.
To access each mode, press the Enter key while S315 is highlighted. Press the Right Arrow key to
advance to the left. The compressor mode can be changed by pressing the Up or Down arrow key.
Once the desired mode is shown, press the Enter key. The compressor state to the far right must
be placed to On if Run Mode or Charge Mode has been selected. No further action is required for
Evacuate Mode.
Run Mode: Allows the compressor to run at any given capacity. The compressor capacity can be
adjusted on line S317.
Evacuate Mode: Allows all solenoid valves in the refrigerant circuit to open, while the
compressor remains Off. This mode is can be used for either leak checking or evacuation. This
mode does not have a timeout period.
Charge Mode: This function allows the compressor to run at 100% loaded capacity for 30
minutes at a time. The suction pressure must be at least 15 psi or the compressor will be stopped.
S316 Compressor 1 Capacity—Enables Compressor 1 Cycle Ramp.
S317 Compressor 1 Cycle Ramp—Allows selecting the capacity the compressor should run at. The
range is 20 - 100%.
S318 Compressor 1 LLSV (Read only)—Shows status of the the liquid line solenoid valve for
Compressor 1. See line S315 to energize the LLSV for leak check and evacuation.
S324 Electric Heat 1 (or HG/HW)—Activates Stage 1 of the unit’s reheat system.
S326 Dehumidification Envelope (Read only): Off/Active status of dehumidification. Off means
the unit is permitted to dehumidify. Active means the dehumidification is suspended due to excessive
dehumidification run time. Also see S305.
S327 Dehumidification Output (Read only)—Shows the On/Off status of for dehumidification.
S328 Humidifier Fill—Activates just the humidifier water source solenoid valve, which fills the
humidifier pan or canister with water. This line does not apply to units manufactured by Liebert
North America.

S329 Humidifier—Activates the humidifier system in its entirety.

S330 Humidifier Drain—Activates just the humidifier drain solenoid in the case of the steam
generating humidifier, allowing water to drain from the canister. This line does not apply to units
manufactured by Liebert North America.
S331 Humidifier Current—In the case of the steam generating humidifier option this setting shows
the power, in amperes, the system is consuming. This line does not apply to units manufactured by
Liebert North America.
Figure 94 Service menus—Diagnostics / Service mode parameters - Page 4 CW models.
S344 becomes
unhidden when
S313 is set to Yes.
Diagnostics Parameters for CW Diagnostics Parameters for CW
Models Models-Manual Mode
Figure 95 Service menus—Diagnostics / Service mode parameters - Page 4 DX models.
S344 becomes
unhidden when
S313 is set to Yes.
Diagnostics Parameters for DX
Models
S335 Alarm Relay—Allows activating the Liebert iCOM® control’s common alarm relay output.
S336 Warning Relay—Allows activating the Liebert iCOM control’s freecooling relay output.
S337 3P Actuator Open—This setting will open the 3P type chilled water actuator to 100%. S338
must be set to Off before setting S337 to On (not shown on DX models).
S338 3P Actuator Close—This setting will open the 3P type chilled water actuator to 100%. S338
must be set to Off before setting S337 to On (not shown on DX models).
S339 Current Fanspeed (Read only)—Shows the analog output for the fan in automatic mode.
S340 Fanspeed Manual Setpoint (Read only)—Drives the analog output for the fan in manual
mode.
Lines S341 through S344 Differ on Chilled Water Units and DX units
Chilled Water
S342 Current MBV / CWV (AnaOut2) (Read Only)—Shows the analog output status for the chilled
water valve in manual or automatic mode.
S344 Manual CWV (AnaOut2)—Parameter is hidden unless S313 is set to Yes; adjusts the CWV
(chilled water valve) manually from 0-100% (not shown on DX models).
DX Water/Glycol Cooled

S341 Condenser Control Mode—Defines the condenser control mode in manual or in auto mode.
User must select Manual and set S313 to Yes before S343 can be changed (not shown on CW models).
S342 Current MBV / CWV (AnaOut2) (Read Only)—Shows the analog output for the MBV
(motorized ball valve) in manual or automatic mode.
S343 Manual MBV (AnaOut2)—Hidden when S313 is set to No. S313 must be set to Manual before
parameter can be adjusted. Adjusts the MBV (motorized ball valve) in manual mode.
S346 Status Remote Shutdown—Shows the status of the unit’s remote shutdown input.
S347 & S348 Status Airflow 1 and 2—Show the status of the unit’s air proof switches.
S349 Status Filter—Shows the status of the unit’s filter clog switch input.
S350, 351, 352 and 353 Status Customer Input 1, 2, 3 and 4—This shows the status of the unit’s
customer inputs.
S354 Status LSI—LSI (Level Sensor Isolator) shows for a bottle humidifier whether the water level
is OK or FULL (Full does not necessarily mean that the bottle is to be replaced; it just stops filling to
avoid overfill). This line does not apply to units manufactured by Liebert North America.
S355 Status Heaters Safety—Shows the status of the unit’s reheat safety switch.
S357 Status HP1—Shows the status of the unit’s Compressor 1 high pressure switch input (not
shown on CW models).
S358 Status LP1—Shows the status of the unit’s Compressor 1 low pressure switch input (not shown
on CW models).
S359 Status LWD—Shows the status of the unit’s Leakage Water Detector (not shown unless LWD
is selected in options setup). This line does not apply to units manufactured by Liebert North
America.
Status Liquitech—Shows the status of the unit’s Liebert Liqui-tect® liquid detection setup.

Figure 98 Service menus Figure 85 Diagnostics / service mode parameters screen - Page 7
11.9 Service—Set Alarms Menu Screens

Figure 99 Service menus—Set alarms parameters screen - Page 1
S204 Temp/Hum Events—Enables or disables all temperature and humidity events. When
disabled, the setpoints to the right of S205-S211 will be hidden.
S205 Initial Time Delay—Sets the delay after the fans have engaged before the S206-S211 can
become active. This delay is intended to prevent nuisance alarm trips when the unit starts. After the
unit fan has started and the delay has elapsed, the delays set on line S262-S267 take priority.
S206 High Supply Temperature—Sets the high temperature threshold that will triggeran alarm
on the Liebert iCOM® and any monitoring system that may be connected. This threshold triggers an
alarm based on supply air temperature. It is ignored if the compressor (DX models) is not in
operation, the chilled water valve opening is less than 20% (chilled water models), within the first
5 minutes of a cooling call or if the electric heaters are energized.
S207 Low Supply Temperature—Sets the low temperature threshold that will trigger an alarm on
the Liebert iCOM and any monitoring system that may be connected. This threshold triggers an
alarm based on supply air temperature. The temperature must stay two degrees above the threshold
for one minute and the event must be acknowledged before it will reset.
S208 High Return Temperature—Sets the threshold temperature for a return high temperature
alarm to occur. The temperature must stay one degree below the threshold for one minute and the
event must be acknowledged before it will reset.
S209 High Return Humidity—Sets the threshold humidity for a return high humidity alarm to
occur. The humidity level must be 2% below the threshold for one minute (nonadjustable) and the

S210 Low Return Humidity—Sets the threshold humidity for a return low humidity alarm to
occur. The humidity level must be 2% above the threshold for one minute (nonadjustable) and the
S211 High CW Temperature—Sets the threshold chilled water for a return high chilled water
temperature alarm to occur. The alarm will reset once the temperature is 5.5°F (3.0°C) lower than the
threshold and the reset delay of 120 second (nonadjustable) has elapsed. This parameter is only
visible on chilled water units (not shown on DX models)
S213, S215, S217 and S219 Customer Input 1, 2, 3 and 4—These parameters select the device and
operation of the customer inputs. Each event reflects a different alarm and possible action to the unit.
Refer to 14.1 Alarms/Events for a description of selectable options.
S214, S216, S218 and S220 Customer Input 1, 2, 3 and 4 active when—These parameters select
whether the input is a normally closed or normally closed input.
CW Alarm Setup Screen DX Alarm Setup Screen
Service-Set Alarms, Pages 3-6, determine the operation of an active alarm. Each event can be enabled
or disabled and can be set to operate as an alarm, warning or message. The delay is the time the
control waits before reporting the event.
• Alarm: Annunciates the buzzer, triggers a monitoring event, triggers the alarm relay and flashes
the red LED on the display.
• Warning: Annunciates the buzzer, triggers a monitoring event, shows the event in the event
viewer / front display and flashes the red LED on the display.
• Message: Shows the event in the event viewer and on the front display.

This screen determines the operation of an active alarm. Each event can be enabled or disabled and
can be set to operate as an alarm, warning or message. The delay is the time the control waits before
reporting the event.
Set Alarms Parameters for CW Set Alarms Parameters for DX
11.10 Service—Sensor Calibration Menu Screens

Figure 104 Service menusFigure 89 Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 1
S602 Return Temperature—Adjusts the return temperature reading from the actual sensor to
compensate for any error of the sensor or to match other sensors in the room.
S630 Calibrated Return Temperature—Shows the adjusted temperature value of the return
sensor. This value is the actual sensor reading (+ or -) the offset “Return Temperature.”
S604 Return Humidity—This parameter adjusts the return humidity reading from the actual
sensor to compensate for any error of the sensor or to match other sensors in the room.

S605 Calibrated Return Humidity—Shows the adjusted humidity value of the return sensor. This
value is the actual sensor reading (+ or -) the offset “Return Humidity.”
S606 Digiscroll 1 NTC—Adjusts the digital scroll 1 NTC reading from the actual sensor to
compensate for any error or drift of the sensor.
S607 Calibrated Digiscroll 1 NTC—Shows the adjusted Digital Scroll 1 NTC sensor value. This
value is the actual sensor reading (+ or -) the offset “Digital Scroll 1 NTC.”
Figure 105 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters — Page 2
Sensor Calibration for CW Models Sensor Calibration for DX Models
S613 T Sensor PTC or NTC—Selects the type of sensor being used for the return air sensor.
S614 Return T Sensor—Provides an offset to the actual sensor reading to calibrate the unit’s sensor
to other sensors.
S615 Calibrated Return T Sensor—Shows the reading after the offset has been added to or
subtracted from the actual sensor reading.
S616 Supply T Sensor PTC or NTC—Sets the type of sensor that is connected to the unit. It is set
at the factory as NTC and should be changed only by a certified Emerson technician.
S617 Supply T Sensor—Provides an offset to the actual sensor reading to calibrate the unit’s sensor
to other sensors.
S618 Calibrated Supply T Sensor—Shows the reading after the offset has been added to or
subtracted from the actual sensor reading.
S619 CW T Sensor—Provides an offset to the actual sensor reading to calibrate the unit's sensor to
other sensors.
S620 Calibrated CW T Sensor—Shows the reading after the offset has been added to or subtracted
from the actual sensor reading.
Figure 106 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 3
This unit can be equipped with a total of 20 rack sensor readings or ten 2T temperature sensor
modules. This menu permits temperature sensor calibration by entering a negative or positive offset.
The calibrated reading is displayed in the far right column. If a value is not shown in the far right
column, then the sensor is either not set up correctly or is not connected.

Figure 107 Service menus—Sensor calibration / setup parameters - Page 4
This unit can be equipped with a total of 20 rack sensor readings or ten 2T temperature sensor
modules. This menu permits temperature sensor calibration by entering a negative or positive offset.
The calibrated reading is displayed in the far right column. If a value is not shown in the far right
column, then the sensor is either not setup correctly or is not connected.
11.11 Service—System/Network Unit-Level Setup Menu Screens

Figure 108 Service menus—System / network setup parameters-System - Page 1 for the Display
S802 Number of Connected Units—Sets the number of units that will be viewable from the large
display [1 - 32] and will participate on the unit to unit network.
S803 Teamwork Mode—Selects which teamwork mode to use within a selected group. Teamwork
modes are:
0 = 0 No
1 = 1 Parallel
2 = 2 Independent
3 = 3 Optimized Aisle
S804 Teamwork Mode is Based on—Two selections are available: Average and Maximum.
Average: Allows the temperature/humidity control to be based on an average reading of the
controlling sensors.
Maximum: Allows the temperature/humidity control to be based on the highest controlling
sensor reading.
S805 Qty Units Included in Average—Allows choosing an average of the highest sensor readings
for the calculation.
S808 Lock for Upgrade—Locks the Liebert iCOM functions to permit upgrading its firmware.

S809 Configuration Safe—Saves or loads configuration settings for the display that have been
modified from the factory defaults to an internal file that can be downloaded / uploaded using the
Liebert iCOM® Service Tool. Selecting Save will write the settings to the internal storage file and
selecting Load will write the settings from the internal storage file to the application software. The
internal file is updated automatically every 12 hours.
S810 Network Safe—Saves or loads network settings for the display that have been modified from
the factory defaults to an internal file that can be downloaded / uploaded using the Liebert iCOM®
Service Tool. Selecting Save will write the settings to the internal storage file and selecting Load will
write the settings from the internal storage file to the application software.
S811 SW Version—Contains the application software version loaded into the Liebert iCOM display.
Figure 109 Service menus—System / network setup parameters-Large display only System - Page 2 for the
Display
S813 IP Address—Contains the network address of the display. This address must be unique to
every other device on the network. This setting is used for the Liebert iCOM board and display
connectivity and for a Liebert iCOM U2U network. Do not use to configure remote monitoring.
S814 Netmask—Divides IP addresses in subnet and specifies the network available to hosts. This
setting is used for Liebert iCOM board and display connectivity and for a Liebert iCOM U2U network.
Do not use to configure remote monitoring.
S815 Gateway—Routes data and acts as a proxy server or a firewall when setting up networks. This
setting is used for the Liebert iCOM board and display connectivity and for a Liebert iCOM U2U
network. Do not use to configure remote monitoring.
S816 MAC (Read Only)—The MAC address is a unique hardware identifier of the Ethernet device.
S817 U2U Protocol (Read Only)—Always set to GBP (Global Bus Protocol).
S818 U2U Address—Unique identifier for each unit on the network. Display addresses range from
33 to 64. Each display on the U2U network must have a different U2U address.
S819 U2U Group—Used to create zones or groups within a U2U network. Once a group number is
selected, the display will see only devices with the same group number. The group number can be
changed to view other devices in different groups.
S820 Bootloader Variables—Indicates whether there has been a change to the bootloader since it
was last loaded, such as monitoring protocol, IP subnet setting, group or U2U number. This
parameter should only be activated by an authorized Liebert Services technician.

Figure 110 Service menus—System/Network setup parameters Unit- Page 1 for the Board
S824 Monitoring Address—Sets the address used by the Liebert IntelliSlot® cards. This is set to 3
at the factory and should not be changed.
S825 Monitoring Timeout/Handshake—Can be used with a building management system to
verify communication has not been lost between the Liebert iCOM® control and the BMS. If the time
specified in this parameter elapses before the BMS writes a new value, then an alarm will occur
“BMS TIMEOUT” and the temperature setpoint will revert to the backup setpoint and the fan speed
“if equipped” will change to 100%. To disable this feature, write a zero to this parameter when it is
active.
S827 Unit Name—A label to identify the unit (6 digits) from the local or remote display. This label
will show at the top right of every screen that has monitoring or configuration of that unit.
S830 Lock for Upgrade—Locks the Liebert iCOM functions to permit upgrading its firmware.
S831 Configuration Safe—Saves or loads configuration settings for the control board that have
been modified from the factory default to an internal file that can be downloaded / uploaded using the
Liebert iCOM Service Tool. Selecting Save will write the settings to the internal storage file and
selecting Load will write the settings from the internal storage file to the application software. The
internal file is updated automatically every 12 hours.
S832 Network Safe—Saves or loads network settings for the control board that have been modified
from the factory defaults to an internal file that can be downloaded / uploaded using the Liebert
iCOM Service Tool. Selecting Save will write the settings to the internal storage file and selecting
Load will write the settings from the internal storage file to the application software.
S833 SW Version—Contains the application software version loaded onto the Liebert iCOM control
board.

Figure 111 Service menus—System/Network setup parameters Unit - Page 2 for the Board
S835 Monitoring Protocol—Selects the monitoring protocol. Velocity V4 is the factory default
which will provide communications to the Liebert IntelliSlot® housing. Hironet is used only on HPM
units.
S836 IP Address—Contains the network address of the display. This address must be unique on the
network. This setting is used for the Liebert iCOM board and display connectivity and for a Liebert
iCOM U2U network. Do not use to configure remote monitoring.
S837 Netmask—Divides IP addresses in subnet and specifies the network available to hosts. This
S838 Gateway— Routes data and acts as a proxy server or a firewall when setting up networks. This
S839 MAC (Read Only)—The MAC address is a unique hardware identifier of the Ethernet device.
S840 U2U Protocol—This parameter is always set to GBP (Global Bus Protocol).
S841 U2U Address—This parameter is a unique identifier for each unit on the network. Display
addresses range from 1 to 32. Each display on the U2U network must have a different U2U address.
S842 U2U Group—Used to create zones or groups within a U2U network. Once a group number is
selected the display will see only devices with the same group number. The group number can be
changed to view devices in different groups.
S843 Bootloader Variables—Indicates whether the bootloader has been changed since it was last
loaded. This parameter should be activated only by an authorized service person.
S844 Static RAM—Shows the status of changes made and whether they have been saved to the
Static Memory on the board. The ranges of are:
• 0=Not Available
• 1=Invalid
• 2=OK
• 3=Changed
• 4=Updating
• 5=Locked.
The right hand paramter has two options:
• 0=nothing
• 1=Clear+Reboot. This clear all the settings in the Static RAM.

11.12 Service—Options Setup Menu Screens

Figure 112 Service menus—Options setup parameters - Page 1
Set Alarms Parameters for CW Set Alarms Parameters for DX
S403 Low Pressure Alarm Delay—Sets the length of time that the unit will ignore a low pressure
condition. This parameter has also been referred to as a Winter Start Time. This parameter permits
the Liebert iCOM to ignore the low pressure transducer reading during low outside temperatures. It
allows refrigerant pressure to build and avoids nuisance low pressure trips. This parameter can be set
between 0 to 5 minutes.
S406 Electric Stages—A Liebert CRV can have only 0 or 1 heating stages.
S407 Heater On at CFC—The selection on which point in the proportional band the heater will start
66% (factory default)
S408 Water Detector—Three selections are available:
• No = No water Detector
• LWD = Selection provided for the Liebert LWD (Leakage Water Detector). A device that senses
water by means of electrical resistance. Not available on units manufactured by Liebert North
America.
• LQTECH = Selection provided for the Liebert Liqui-tect® (LT410 OR LT460). See the Liebert
Liqui-tect user manual, SL-31000, available at Liebert’s Web site (www.liebert.com) for
connection/configuration details.
S409 Water Detector Function—allows to set the activity when water is detected
• Alarm: Activates the WATER UNDER FLOOR, no further action.
• Lockhum: Activates the WATER UNDER FLOOR and locks the humidifier out.
• Shutdown: Activates the WATER UNDER FLOOR and shuts the unit down.
S410 3P Actuator Runtime—If Valve Control is selected for Time, then this parameter sets the
travel time of the valve to determine the full open and closed position of the valve. This setting is
made at the factory based on the valves manufacturer specifications.
S411 3P Actuator Direction—Selects if the valve is a Direct or Reverse acting valve.

S413 WA and AL Relay—Defines if the relays are normally On (and fall to Off in case of an event) or
normally Off (and change to On in case of an event).
S419 Dehumidification Enabled—Selects whether the compressor or valve will be used to
dehumidify when the humidity is above the setpoint.
S420 Auto Restart Enabled—This parameter, when set to YES, restarts the unit after a power
cycle. When this parameter is set to NO, then the unit will not restart (Turn On) after a power cycle.
S421 Single Unit Auto Restart—Sets a time delay for the unit to restart when the Auto Restart
Enabled is set to YES. The delay, adjustable from 0-999 seconds, begins once the boot process has
completed. This parameter allows units to be staggered On to reduce the amount of simultaneous
power consumption after a loss of power.
S422 On-Off Enabled—Disables the power button on the front of the display. Prevents the user
from turning Off the equipment from the User or System view. When this parameter is set to Off and
the user attempts to turn Off the unit, a message will appear stating “On-Off is disabled!” The default
configuration is On.
Setup Parameters Chilled Water Unit Options Setup Parameters DX unit
S424 Chilled Water Quick Start—Can be enabled only for chilled water units. This function allows
to restart a Liebert CRV after a power cycle within approximately 10 seconds.
During quick start, the control is not active. The digital output for the fan activates, the fan speed
operates on the voltage selected on S426 and the chilled water valve opens to the voltage set in S427.
When quick start is enabled:
• S425 Fan Digital Output P2-3 changes to On (cannot be changed by the user)
• S426 Fan Analog Output P14-1 changes to 7.5V (can be changed by the user)
• S427 Valve Analog Output P14-3 changes to 7.5V (can be changed by the user)
After each power cycle, the Liebert CRV will adjust fan and cooling output according to the
settings on lines S426 and S427. These user-defined settings will override the actual call for fan
and cooing until the delay set on S428 has elapsed.

S428 Quick Start Overlap Time: When iCOM is ready with the boot process, a time can be added to
continue the static quick start mode, giving the Liebert iCOM the chance to build calls meanwhile,
and seamlessly overtake control when S428 times out.
S429 Last Quick Start Duration—Informational only. Shows the time of the last quick start.
S430 Boot loader Variables: IMPORTANT: any change of quick start (EN to Disable, or DIS the
Enable) must be followed by executing Boot Loader Variables: Save and Reboot.
NOTE
Quick start is performed at each power cycle, no matter if the unit was in operation or in an Off
state before the power cycle. When the unit was in an Off state and quick start is finished, the
unit will stop again.
Figure 115 Service—Service Contact Menu

Table 34 Service contact info parameters

Function
Range Imperial
Large Display Small Display (metric)
Page 1 of 1
Password PASSWORD —
None
Austria
Switzerland D
Switzerland F
Benelux D
Benelux FL
Germany
France
UK
Country Country Hungary
Italy
Poland
Spain
United States
Australia
New Zealand
Indonesia
Malaysia
Singapore
Address line 1 Address line 1 text-string

11.13 Service—Remote Sensors Menu Screens

Figure 116 Service menus—Remote Sensor Setup
Rack Sensors are automatically detected when connected and set to Control. A maximum of ten 2T
temperature and humidity sensors can be connected; the control automatically detects the type.
Control—The Liebert CRV is using the sensor for temperature control.
Reference—The sensor value is shown but used only for monitoring.
Disable—No sensor connected.

Operation in Teamwork Mode
12.0 OPERATION IN TEAMWORK MODE
12.1 Unit-to-Unit Network Wiring

Liebert CRV's can be connected in a unit-to-unit, or U2U, configuration, which allows multiple units
to communicate with each other, sharing of local unit status and sensor readings. The U2U network
will allow up to 32 units to be connected within a single group and up to 99 different groups to exists
on the same physical network. Groups can be used to create zones of influence so that only the Liebert
CRV's serving a common area will work together and back each other up.
The U2U setup unlocks the use of Lead-Lag/Rotation, Cascade and Teamwork Modes 1, 2 and 3
Lead-lag/rotation allows a standby Liebert CRV to activate based on an alarm or on a rotation
based on time.
Cascade provides staging of the Liebert CRV's based on the actual temperature and its relation to
the temperature setpoint.
Teamwork Modes 1, 2 and 3
• No Teamwork: All units operate independently; using their local sensors.
• Teamwork Mode 1 (Parallel): All units use a shared temperature PI value for heating/cooling
control and a shared humidity PI for humidification/dehumidification.)
• Teamwork Mode 2 (Independent) Avoid units performing conflicting operations. For example: (a)
units are not allowed to heat if other units are cooling, and (b) units are not allowed to humidify if
other units are dehumidifying.
• Teamwork Mode 3 (Smart Aisle) All units use a shared fan speed PI value; and drive cooling from
local sensors.
12.2 Liebert iCOM U2U Ethernet Network

The Liebert iCOM U2U network must be isolated from other network traffic. The network switch(es)
that connect Liebert iCOM controls must be dedicated to supporting only Liebert iCOM
communication. The U2U network cannot be connected to the building or IT network. If U2U
communication is lost, all Liebert iCOM-controlled cooling units will continue to operate as
independent units.
The Liebert iCOM control can support up to 64 nodes on one network. An input/output board, large
display and large wall-mount display are each considered one node. Of the 64 nodes that may be
connected, no more than 32 may be input/output boards (32 cooling units).
Network communication can be configured during system startup by a Emerson-trained technician.
For technical issues contact:
Liebert Thermal Management Support
Telephone: 1-800-LIEBSRV (1-800-543-2378) option 3 M-F 8-5 EST

12.3 Wiring a Liebert iCOM U2U Network

A network switch is required to enable Ethernet unit-to-unit communication on one or more Liebert
CRV's. Each Liebert CRV requires two straight-through Ethernet cables from a network switch. One
cable connects to port P64 on the Liebert iCOM input/output board and the other straight-through
cable connects to the P64 port on the back of the large display (see Figure 117).
Figure 117 U2U Network Setup
Display Service /Network

Display Service/Network
Liebert iCom Display Menu
IP Address: 192.168.254.033
IP Address: 192.168.254.034
U2U Address: 33 U2U Address: 34
Group #: 1
Group #: 1
---------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
Display Service /Network
Liebert Cooling Unit
Control Board Menu
Control Board Menu
IP Address: 192.168.254.001
IP Address: 192.168.254.002
U2U Address: 1
U2U Address: 2
Group #: 1
Group #: 1
with Large Liebert
iCOM Display

with Large Liebert
iCOM Display
Network
Switch
IP Address: 192.168.254.035
U2U Address: 35
Group #: 1 Liebert Cooling Unit
--------------------------------------- with Large Liebert
Liebert Cooling Unit iCOM Display
Control Board Menu
IP Address: 192.168.254.003
U2U Address: 3
Group #: 1
Wall-Mount Large Display

The Liebert CRV has a large display as standard equipment. Only large displays may be used for
remotely monitoring and controlling cooling units connected on the same network. Each wall-mount
large display requires 120V input power; Liebert provides an AC adapter wall plug. A straight
through Ethernet cable must be connected between the network switch and the P64 port on the back
of the display. This will enable control and monitoring capabilities to any cooling unit connected to the
network.

Figure 118 U2U network diagram-600mm (24in. ) Liebert CRV

Figure 119 U2U network diagram-300mm (12in. ) Liebert CRV
12.4 Teamwork Modes

Groups of cooling units connected to a network can be set up to work together in any of four teamwork
modes:
• No Teamwork
• Teamwork Mode 1
• Teamwork Mode 2
• Teamwork Mode 3
All Liebert iCOM-controlled cooling units on a network must be set to run in the same teamwork
mode.

Figure 120 Teamwork modes and sensor management

Average / Maximum of Liebert CRV Connected Sensors
Average / Maximum of Teamwork Sensors
Example: 72°F (22°C) Setpoint
Teamwork Sensor Average = 74°F (23°C)
Teamwork Sensor Maximum = 76°F (24°C)
Sensor
(one of 8)
Liebert CRV 1 Liebert Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Liebert Liebert CRV 2
Max = 72°F (22°C) CRV 1 Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack CRV 2 Max = 76°F (24°C)
12.4.1 Application of Teamwork Modes

• No Teamwork: Multiple zones in one room
• Teamwork Mode 1: Balanced load (small groups of units inside the same environment)
• Teamwork Mode 2: Unbalanced load (large rooms, not all units will have the same load) (works
well for most applications)
• Teamwork Mode 3: Optimized Aisle (allows the cooling capacity to be controlled off the supply
sensor to operate as a local control by removing only the amount of load required to maintain the
discharge air temperature at each unit. The supply temperature setpoint can be adjusted for each
unit. This allows optimal control for an unbalanced room load. The fan speed is controlled by the
remote rack sensors of all units, providing a controlled delivery method of the air to the cold aisle.
This distribution is achieved by operating all fans in parallel, which will also yield the greatest
energy efficiency.
All units in the same group will run in the same Teamwork Mode.
12.4.2 No Teamwork
Each cooling unit works independently, responding to its own sensors.
Standby function and unit rotation are possible but cascading is not (see Standby and Cascade on
page 138). AutoSet will not adjust the proportional band in this mode.

12.4.3 Teamwork Mode 1

Teamwork Mode 1 works best in small rooms with balanced heat loads. The return temperature and
humidity sensor readings of all units in operation (fan On) are averaged by the master unit and
displays this information in the System View. Control can be based on either the maximum or
average temperature readings of the connected units in the group. If set to control off an average, the
number of units calculated in the average can be set lower than the total number of units connected.
This provides a more defined control strategy, by taking into account only the worst case readings.
The master unit will send the operating requirements to all operating units according to unit
numbers.
In this teamwork mode, most of the parameters are shared; if set in any one of the units, all other
units will follow with the same settings. AutoSet will adjust the proportional band in Teamwork
Mode 1.
The master unit evenly divides the system proportional band among the number of available units.
Each unit will receive instruction on how to operate from the master unit based on how far the system
deviates from the setpoints. Fans, compressors, and chilled water valves will operate in parallel as
temperature deviates from set point. See Figure 121 and paragraphs below for more information.
The number of available units is calculated like:
• In non-standby configuration: all units with fan On
• In typical standby function (no cascade): all units with fan On
• In cascade mode: all units that could operate (no alarm, which forces the unit to switch Off, unit
not switched Off, etc.)
NOTE
Low limit and reheat during dehumidification are managed from each unit independently.
Figure 121 shows how two cooling units work together in Teamwork Mode 1. Since Unit 1 and Unit 2
are available to operate, the master unit, Unit 1, averages the temperature and humidity sensor
readings from each unit.
The master unit determines that a 60% call for cooling is required for the system. Since there are two
available cooling units, each unit makes up half of the system proportional band; Unit 1 handles
0-50% system call for cooling and Unit 2 handles 51-100%. For every 1% system call for cooling, each
unit provides 2% of its total cooling capacity.
The 60% system call for cooling exceeds the 50% Unit 1 can provide, so Unit 1 operates at full
capacity. The remaining 10% system call for cooling (60% - 50% = 10%) is handled by Unit 2. Unit 2
responds by operating at 20% cooling capacity (50% ÷ 10% = 20%).

Figure 121 Teamwork Mode 1 with three cooling units

Shared System Deviation Ramp (System CFC)
0% +33 % +66 % +100 %
100 %
System CFC
0%
Fanspeed
100 %
Compressors
20%
100 %
Chilled Water Valves
0%
12.4.4 Teamwork Mode 2

Teamwork Mode 2 is designed to prevent units within a group from working in opposing modes,
effectively “fighting” each other. It is best applied in large rooms with unbalanced heat loads. In
Teamwork Mode 2, all temperature and humidity parameters are shared. Unit #1 takes a
user-defined average or maximum sensor reading on the network to determine whether there is a
cooling, dehumidification or humidification request. To further improve control output, when the
Liebert iCOM is set to control off an average, the number of units calculated in the average can be set
lower than the total number of units connected. This provides a more defined control strategy, by
taking into account only the worst case readings.
If there is a cooling request, all units are released to start cooling resources according to their own
temperature readings; and operate cooling off their own unique temperature control bands. If some of
the units sense a cooler temperature, they are permitted to reduce cooling to keep from cooling the
space beyond the temperature setpoint. If the master determines the greatest demand is for
dehumidification, the units that require dehumidification are released to operate in that mode. Units
in the group that may have only a small request for humidification will the remain idle for maximum
energy saving and control.
Teamwork Mode 2 does not rotate; unevenly distributed working hours to be expected. AutoSet will
not adjust the proportional band in this mode.
NOTE
The Liebert CRV is designed to use Teamwork Mode 3 where three 2T sensors are supplied to
monitor the temperature at the racks and ramp the fans accordingly.
NOTE
In Teamwork Mode 2, all units must have the same setpoints. The units’ proportional band,
deadband and related settings may be different.

12.4.5 Teamwork Mode 3 (Optimized Aisle)

Teamwork Mode 3 can be selected when the units are set to operate in Optimized Aisle Control mode
and have been connected in a unit to unit (U2U) network. Teamwork provides coordination between
the units that will prevent “fighting” by not allowing units to operate in conflicting modes of operation
at the same time by selecting which mode to operate within based on the maximum or average
reading of the collective unit sensors (Humidifying vs. Dehumidifying). When the units are set to
control off an average, the number of units calculated in the average can be set lower than the total
number of units connected. This provides a more-defined control strategy by taking into account only
the worst-case readings.
Teamwork Mode 3 allows the cooling capacity (Supply Sensor) to operate as a local control by
removing only the amount of load required to maintain the discharge air temperature at each unit.
This allows for an unbalanced room load while maintaining a consistent discharge air temperature.
The fan speed is controlled by the remote rack sensors of all units, providing a controlled delivery
method of the air to the cold aisle. This distribution is achieved by operating all fans in parallel, which
will also yield the greatest energy efficiency.
12.4.6 Standby-Rotation
Typical Standby (Lead/Lag) Function
This function can be performed in any teamwork mode, including NO Teamwork.
One or more units can be defined to be Standby; the normal status of standby units is Standby Off
(fan Off).
If one regular unit has an alarm that is defined (to be defined in the alarm configuration), to switch
On a standby unit, the faulty unit will switch Off and the standby unit will switch On.
If the next unit has an alarm, the next standby unit will be started. If no more standby units are
available, the unit with a non-critical alarm that permits unit operation will be switched On again
(water detection, fan alarm, fire alarm etc. will not permit a unit to restart).
The standby function can be rotated daily, weekly or monthly.
The rotation is performed with a selectable number of units: if 1 is selected, to standby rotates from
1-2 to 2-3 in a four unit configuration with two standby units, and rotates from 1-2 to 3-4 in the same
configuration, when the rotation parameter is set to 2.
Standby and Cascade

Cascade is possible in Teamwork Modes 1 and 3 only.
• Cooling for Teamwork Mode 1
• Fan PI for Teamwork Mode 3 (Optimized Aisle)
Standby units will start if an alarm occurs in one of the active units. If the standby units are
cascaded, they will also start and work with the regular active units if the temperature cannot be
controlled by the active units; before a high or low temperature condition occurs. Cascaded units are
switched off again as soon as the temperature returns back to normal.
When Cooling is set as the cascade mode, units will be started based on the CFC (call for cooling)—
Teamwork Mode 1.
When Fan PI is set as the cascade mode, units will be started based on the CFF (call for fan)—
Teamwork Mode 3.
NOTE
Cascaded units are not included in the calculation of the average temperature / humidity.

Table 35 Teamwork Mode 1 or 3, definition of Serial, Parallel and Local

Mode A (C = SUPPLY / F = SUPPLY) Teamwork Mode 3
Cooling On-Off Local
Cooling Capacity Local
Low Supply Limit Control N/A
Fanspeed Parallel
Re-Heat during Dehum Local
Humidification Serial
Dehumidification Serial
Mode B (C = REMOTE / F = REMOTE) Teamwork Mode 1
Cooling Capacity Parallel
Low Supply Limit Control Local
Fanspeed Parallel
Mode C (C = RETURN / F = RETURN) Teamwork Mode 1
Fanspeed Parallel
Mode D (C = SUPPLY / F = REMOTE) Teamwork Mode 3
Fanspeed Parallel
Mode E (C = SUPPLY / F = RETURN) Teamwork Mode 3
Fanspeed Parallel
Mode F (C = REMOTE / F = RETURN) Teamwork Mode 1
Low Supply Limit Control Local
Fanspeed Parallel

Remote Rack Sensor Wiring
13.0 REMOTE RACK SENSOR WIRING

Three 2T sensors come standard with each Liebert CRV (both 600mm and 300mm models). The
Liebert CRV is capable of supporting up to ten (10) 2T remote rack temperature sensors. It is
recommended that one (1) 2T housing be attached to each rack the Liebert CRV is intended to cool.
The sensors provide feedback directly to the cooling unit to improve efficiency and performance. Rack
sensors help combat cooling problems related to recirculation air, uneven rack loading and air
distribution. The 2T rack sensors are intended for cold aisle use only.
While installing the rack sensors is optional, Emerson recommends that they be installed.
Installations with multiple Liebert CRV cooling units should be connected in a Unit-to-Unit (U2U)
Ethernet network to leverage all of the Liebert iCOM® control benefits.
A sensor network can be extended at any time by connecting additional 2T sensors to the last 2T
temperature and humidity sensor on the network. Sensors connect in a daisy chain fashion back to
the cooling unit; individual wires from each sensor to the cooling unit are avoided.
There are four steps to setting up a remote rack sensor:
• Determine the location of sensors and mounting. See 13.1 DIP Switch Settings.
• Set the DIP switches of the remote rack sensor must be configured to have a unique ID. See
Sections 13.2 through 13.4
• Route the CANbus cables and make the connections at the CRV and 2T sensors mounted on the
racks. See Sections 13.5 through 13.8.
• Configure the Liebert iCOM—Control must be set to use the remote rack sensor as either a
controlling sensor or as a reference sensor. See 13.8 Remote Rack Sensor Operation and
Rack View Setup.
Figure 122 2T rack sensor
Back View
2T Sensor 3/16"
1-5/8" (4.5mm)
4-7/16" (41mm)
2-5/8" (112mm)
(67mm)
Each temperature
3-3/8" probe wire is
(86mm) 6 feet (1830mm)
long
Front View Max Depth DPN001983
1-5/8" (41mm) Temperature Sensing Probe Rev. 1
13.1 DIP Switch Settings

Three 2T sensor housings are included with each Liebert CRV. The DIP switches in these sensors
have been preset at the factory. It is recommended that you confirm that the DIP switches have been
set correctly using the below table. Any additional 2T sensor housings will need their DIP switches
set per the below table. If the dip switches are not set correctly, the control will not operate properly.
Figure 123 DIP switches in 2T sensors
Switch Up = ON
Switch Down = OFF

Table 36 DIP switch settings

DIP Switch Position
2T Temperature and Factory-Set
Humidity Sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 to Terminated
Included with Liebert CRV
Sensor # 1 Off Off On Off -
Sensor # 2 On Off On Off On Off Off Off -
Sensor # 3 Off On On Off Yes
Optional 2T Rack Sensors
Sensor # 4 On On On Off -
Sensor # 5 Off Off Off On -
Sensor # 6 On Off Off On -
Sensor # 7 Off On Off On On Off Off Off -
Sensor # 8 On On Off On -
Sensor # 9 Off Off On On -
Sensor # 10 On Off On On -
13.2 Set 2T Rack Sensor Identities-DIP Switch settings

1. Confirm the DIP switches are set correctly for 2T sensors numbered 1, 2 and 3.
2. If additional sensors are to be connected to a cooling unit:
a. Apply numbered stickers to the sensor housings, corresponding to sensor chain position.
b. Based on the sensor number, use the included DIP switch tool to set the DIP switches
according to the table above. If you are having difficulty setting switches through the opening
in the housing or if the hole is not present, you may open the case by removing the three
Phillips head screws. Reassemble housing once complete.
Figure 124 Setting DIP switches for 2T sensors
2T Sensor Terminal Non-Conductive

Housing DIP switch hole DIP Switch Tool
(field-supplied)
2T Sensor Housing Case Opened
NOTE
Use a field-supplied DIP switch tool (or similar non-conductive tool) to move the DIP switches.
Do not insert any metal object into the sensor case.

13.3 Terminating the Last 2T Sensor on a Network

The last 2T sensor on the network, which can be identified by having only one CAN cable plugged into
it, must be terminated. All other 2T sensors on the network must remain unterminated. 2T sensor #3
is terminated at the factory (the sensors are labeled). As long as Sensor #3 is the last sensor on the
network, none of the other termination jumpers in the other sensors need to be adjusted.
The sensors do not need to be connected in numerical order.
For example, if five sensors are purchased, they can be connected in the following pattern:
In the example above, if additional sensors are added to an existing sensor network, Sensor #3 must
be unterminated. The additional sensors can then be connected and the new last sensor on the
network will have to be terminated.
2T sensors may be terminated in either of two ways, with a factory-supplied termination plug or with
jumpers.
13.3.1 Using the Factory-Supplied Plug to Terminate the Last 2T Sensor on a Network
The Liebert CRV is furnished with 2T sensors and an RJ-45 termination plug. Arrange the sensors
and network as detailed in 13.7 Sensor Location and Mounting. Insert the termination plug into
the RJ-45 connection on the 2T temperature and humidity sensor board (see Figure 125).
Figure 125 Termination with factory-supplied plug
Circuit board inside

the 2T Sensor
Terminal in the
Liebert CRV
Insert
Termination
Plug in P67
13.3.2 Using Jumper to Terminate the Last 2T Rack Sensor on a Network
NOTE
Using a jumper to terminate a 2T sensor in a Liebert CRV requires removing the sensor
housing from the cooling unit.
A jumper can be used to terminate a 2T sensor if no factory-supplied termination plug is available.

To terminate a 2T sensor with a jumper:
1. Open the sensor's case by removing the screws that hold it together, usually three.
2. Pull the black jumper off the circuit board from Pins 1 and 2 (see Figure 130).
3. Install the jumper on Pins 2 and 3.
4. Reassemble the sensor housing.

Figure 126 Termination jumper setting

2T Sensor Housing
(back)
DIP
switches
Screws,
typically 3
Circuit board inside display housing Circuit board inside 2T sensor housing
Termination Jumper
in the Terminated Position
3 2 1 3 2 1
Unterminated Terminated

Figure 127 Removing the remote temperature/humidity sensor cover and setting DIP switches
See Detail Area
Remote Sensor DIP switch

and Jumper Locations
DETAIL AREA
Sensor
DIPswitch
and Jumper P3
Locations P6
6 12435768
SW
1
P6
7
Rotated 180°
On
Switches On: 1, 5
Jumper On: 2, 3
Switches Off: 2, 3, 4,
Off 6, 7, 8
3 2 1 12345678 192738
P3 Rev. 4

13.4 CANbus and Ethernet Cable Wiring

Additional 2T Rack Temperature Sensor Kits allow additional 2T sensors to be connected to a Liebert
CRV. Each Liebert CRV includes three 2T sensors and three interconnecting shielded CAN cables. Up
to an additional seven 2T sensors can be connected to a Liebert CRV for a total of 10 sensors.
Additional 2T sensors can be purchased in kits of 1, 3 or 7, which include one, three or seven
additional shielded CAN cables, each 6 ft. (1.8m) long. Kits include 2T sensor(s), cable ties,
instructions and shielded CAN cable(s) to protect against electronic interference.
Additional 2T Rack Temperature Sensor shielded CAN cables are available in lengths of 10, 20 and 30
feet (3, 6 and 9.1m). The longer cables are useful when spanning a cold aisle and when a 2T sensor is
more than one rack away from the nearest connection point. A maximum of 150 feet of
interconnecting CAN cables can be connected to a single Liebert CRV.
CANbus Cables
Shielded cable consists of three pairs of twisted wires with a six-pin RJ-12 connector
NOTICE
Risk of improper wiring. Can cause equipment damage.
Mismatching wire pins at the RJ12 connection will damage the CAN device. Extreme caution
should be taken when making cables.
• Keep control and communication cables away from power cables to prevent electromagnetic
interference.
• Do not bend cables to less than four times the diameter of the cable.
• Do not deform cables when securing them in bundles or when hanging them.
• Keep cables away from devices that can introduce noise into them, such as machines, fluorescent
lights and electronics.
• Avoid stretching cables; tension when pulling cables should not exceed 25 pounds (11kg) of
pulling tension.
• Do not secure cables with any method that might damage them. Use approved hangers, such as
those for telephone wire or RG-6 coaxial cable, available at most hardware stores.

Figure 128 CANbus wire Cable with Grounding Wire
Solder
Heat Shrink
Ground Wire 3 4
A
Drain Wire
1.25
6
Detail A
1 4
5 5
1
.25" 2
Pin 1
Pin 1
Label: Label:
1.5 7 “Sensor End” 7 1.5
“Unit End”
Length
(Depends on Part #)
Black
1
2
Brown
Blue
1
2 } Pair 1 Notes:
1. Length tolerances for each dimensioned segment are ± .25 up to 12.00, ± .50 for 12.00 to 24.00, and
above 24.00 is equal to ± 1.0.
3
4
Violet
Yellow
3
4 } Pair 2 2. Wire identification numbers or letters are hot stamped on each end of a wire.
3. Any wire not terminated into a terminal/connector is provided with a strip length of .50.
4. Assembly must be provided in accordance with latest revision of Emerson engineering specification 1A10952.
5
6
Green
5
6 } Pair 3 5. Information in parenthesis is not to be hot stamped.
6. Wire tie(s) and jumper(s) require no specific location(s). Wire ends align on left side unless otherwise specified.
7. Labels 3" from connection.
WIRE CONNECTION 181510
Pg. 1, Rev. 4
8 Snag Proof/Molded
Label Including Liebert Part Number, Protector
Manufacture date, Manufacturer Name Typ (2) Ends
10-12" From Connector End Of Cable
Ring Terminal for No. 8 Screw

.540
20 Gauge Insulated
Ground Wire
Ground Wire Soldered
Shrink Tubing To Drain Wire, Covered
If Applicable By Molding
Pin 1
4" Min.
Pin 1
1" Max. 7 7 Label: 1" to 1.75"

This End Only “Unit End”
Length
(Depends on Part #)
Notes:
Black 1. Length tolerances for each dimensioned segment are ± .25 up to 12.00, ± .50 for 12.00 to 24.00, and
1
2
Brown
Blue
1
2 } Pair 1 above 24.00 is equal to ± 1.0.
2. Wire identification numbers or letters are hot stamped on each end of a wire.
3. Any wire not terminated into a terminal/connector is provided with a strip length of .50.
3
4
Violet
3
4 } Pair 2 4. Assembly must be provided in accordance with latest revision of Emerson engineering specification 1A10952.
5. Information in parenthesis is not to be hot stamped.
6. Wire tie(s) and jumper(s) require no specific location(s). Wire ends align on left side unless otherwise specified.
Yellow
5
6
Green
6
5
} Pair 3 7. Labels 3" from connection.
8. All agency information (UL andCSA), 300V rating, 75°C temperature rating, 24 AWG (3P), STP, <15pf/ft
capacitance and CMP labeled on cable.
181510
Pg. 2, Rev. 4
WIRE CONNECTION

13.5 Route the CANbus Wire into the Cooling Unit-600mm (24")
The CANbus sensors connect to the open CAN port on the back of the unit display panel. The display
comes terminated from the factory and must be unterminated to allow connecting additional sensors.
See Figure 126 for termination jumper location for front panel display and sensor boards. Note that
connecting the CAN bus sensors will require entering the high-voltage electrical compartment of the
Liebert CRV. Emerson recommend having installation performed by a properly trained and qualified
electrician.
Figure 129 Route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-600mm (24")
Inside of Display Door DPN001983

Rev. 0
As Shipped, No Field Wiring Connected Top Entry Wiring in Field
Connect the 10ft CAN wire to the open CAN bus port on the rear of the Liebert iCOM.
Ensure there is enough slack in the wire to allow the door to open and close freely, but not so much
that the wire could be in a bind or pinched when the door is shut. Emerson recommends securing the
wiring with cable ties.
Connect the other end of the 10ft. (3m) CAN cable to the nearest 2T rack sensor. Use additional CAN
cables to connect the remaining 2T rack sensors to each other. The order in which the 2T temperature
and humidity sensors are attached does not matter; however, be sure that the last sensor connected is
the one set to “terminated.” Avoid using excessive lengths of cable between sensors.

13.6 Route the CANbus Wire into the Cooling Unit-300mm (12")
Connecting the CANbus sensors will require working in the high-voltage electrical compartment of
the Liebert CRV. Emerson recommends having installation performed by a properly trained and
qualified electrician.
! WARNING
Disconnect all local and remote electric power supplies and wear appropriate personal
protective equipment per NFPA 70E before working within the electric control enclosures.
CANbus cabling will be near the Liebert CRV's main disconnect switch, which has high
voltage supply power. Some of the CANbus cabling must be done without a clear view of the
high-voltage wiring and contact with the high-voltage connections.
mode.
A 2T Sensor Terminal is factory-installed in the Liebert CRV 300mm (12") unit's electric panel section
(see Figure 130). This terminal is factory-wired to the Liebert iCOM on the front of the Liebert CRV.
The display comes “Terminated” from the factory and must be “Un-terminated' to allow connecting
additional sensors. See Figure 126 for termination jumper location for front panel display and sensor
boards.
Connect a CANbus cable to the factory-installed 2T Sensor Terminal inside the 300mm (12") Liebert
CRV as shown in Top entry route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-300mm (12") DX. Route the
CANbus cable out of the Liebert CRV to an external 2T Sensor Terminal and sensors on the racks as
shown in Top entry route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-300mm (12") DX. See Figures 131
and 132 for an example of arranging the sensor array.
Use additional CAN cables to connect the remaining 2T rack sensors to each other. Avoid using
excessive lengths of cable between sensors. The order in which the 2T temperature and humidity
sensors are attached does not matter. However, the last sensor connected must be set to “terminated.”
Refer to 13.3 Terminating the Last 2T Sensor on a Network for details.

Figure 130 Top entry route the CANbus wire into the cooling unit-300mm (12") DX
2T Sensor Wiring
Access Point
Sensor wire exits through this

knockout. Additional 2T
sensors may be connected in
a daisy chain to monitor
conditions at additional racks.
Temperature and
Humidity
Sensor Housing
(factory-wired
to the Liebert iCOM®
Factory Wiring
Low-Voltage
Field Wiring
13.7 Sensor Location and Mounting

Both temperature and humidity sensors attached to a 2T sensor housing are to be installed on the
same rack. The sensor may be attached to the inside or outside of the rack's front door.
• One temperature sensor is to be attached near the top of the rack's front door by using a cable tie
to secure the wire to the perforation (approximate 12" [305mm] from the top). Do not wrap a cable
tie around the actual sensor on the end of the wire. This sensor will monitor for hot air wrapping
over the top of the rack from the hot aisle.
• The other temperature sensor is to be attached to the rack's front door, centered in front of the
heat generating equipment that will be drawing in air.
• If the rack is completely filled with equipment, locate the sensor in the middle of the door,
width and height.
• If the rack is partially filled with equipment, locate the sensor in the center of the equipment
on the front door.
• Do NOT
• Install a sensor in the hot aisle
• Leave a sensor coiled on top of or inside the rack.
• With the temperature sensors in place, neatly route the wires up the rack door and into the rack
securing them with the supplied cable ties. Be sure to leave an appropriate amount of slack in the
cable to allow the rack door to open and close without binding or pinching the wires.
• Affix the 2T sensor housing to the rack using the supplied hook-and-loop fastener. Emerson
recommends installing the housing in an easily accessible space with the sensor number label
visible for maintenance and troubleshooting.
• Repeat this process until all sensors have been installed.

Figure 131 2T rack sensors installed on neighboring racks-600mm (24") models

600mm (24") Liebert CRV’s shown;
arrangement is same for 300mm (12") units
2T Sensor Chain
12" (305mm)
Approximate
center of rack;
in front of IT
equipment
Install temperature sensors on the

perforated portion of the rack door
using the supplied zip-ties.
Ensure that the door can swing freely
without binding the cables.
DPN001983
Rev. 1

Figure 132 2T rack sensors installed on neighboring racks-300mm (12") models
4-3/8"
Sensor wire enters 300mm (112mm)
(12") Liebert CRV’s at rear;
1-5/8"
refer to Figure 130. (41mm) 2 5/8"
(67mm)
3/16"
(4mm)
86
Maximum Depth (3 3/8")
1-5/8" (41mm)
Each temperature
FRONT VIEW probe wire is
6ft (1.8m) long REAR VIEW
Temperature sensing probes

12"
(305mm)
Cable Connection Entry

Top Inlet
Approximate
center of
rack in front Remove terminating
of equipment plug. Install terminating
plug into last sensor.
Install CAN cable

into the slot previously
occupied by the
terminating plug.
Liebert IntelliSlot temperature sensor
located in the rear of the unit.
Install temperature sensors on the perforated
portion of the rack door using the supplied
wire ties. Ensure door can swing open freely
without binding cables.
Bottom inlet see DPN002813 for Air, Water/Glycol DPN002975

units and DPN002815 for Chilled Water units. REV 0
The sensors can be set up to either display or control temperature, give them a rack name and draw a
rack layout that can be viewed in the User menu. To do so, go to the Service / Rack Setup Menu of the
Liebert iCOM® display.

13.8 Remote Rack Sensor Operation and Rack View Setup

Figure 133 Remote Sensor Setup, page 1 of 1
Once the remote rack sensors have been configured and plugged into the CANbus network, the
control can be configured to use the sensor for either control or reference. If the sensor is set to
Disable, it will be ignored. The sensor node number corresponds to the DIP switch assignment of the
sensor.

Operation
14.0 OPERATION
Figure 134 Temperature and humidity sensor terminal, viewed from the rear of the unit-600mm (24")
models
Temperature
and Humidity
Sensor Terminal
Air Temperature Suction

Probe Position-Only
With Temperature Control
Figure 135 Temperature and humidity sensor and filter clog sensor viewed from front of unit-300mm (12")
DX models
Filter Clog
Temperature Sensor
and humidity
sensor
The control system compares the relayed information with the programmed setpoint and proportional
band values and performs one of the following operations:
Cooling—Direct expansion mode (DX): The compressor is started and the cold refrigerant flows
through the evaporator, thus cooling the air passing through it. Liebert recommends using the supply
temperature sensor to control the cooling capacity of the Liebert CRV, but cooling can be managed
from any of the temperature sensors. The supply temperature is an accurate representation of the
actual heat rejection the Liebert CRV needs to perform. Chilled water Liebert CRV models will
modulate the cooling capacity from 0% to 100% and DX models will modulate the cooling capacity
from 20% to100% compressor capacity. To avoid short-cycling the compressor during room heat load
changes, the Liebert CRV will not deactivate the compressor until the air temperature is below 150%
of temperature setpoint when in Remote or Supply Air Control or below 200% of temperature setpoint
when operating in Return Air Control.
Chilled Water Mode (CW)—The three-way valve is opened and the chilled water flows through the
coil, thus cooling the air passing through it.

Operation
Reheating—Electrical heating (optional): The heating elements heat the air passing over them
during dehumidifcation. The heating control is active only when the unit is in dehumidification mode.
The reheats will only activate when the unit is dehumidifying. The reheats will begin activation when
the control temperature has dropped to -66% of the control's proportional band and will deactivate
when temperature setpoint has been reached.
Dehumidification (DX mode)—The temperature of the cooling coil is reduced to remove moisture
from the air (refer to Service menus-Setpoints parameters screen - Page 2, Service menus-Setpoints
parameters screen - Page 3, Service menus-Diagnostics / service mode parameters screen - Page 3 and
Service menus-Opt).
NOTE
If dehumidification cannot reach its setpoint within a set amount of time, the unit will delay
dehumidification to allow the room temperature to stabilize.
• In dehumidification mode, the air after passing over the coil is reheated (if needed) by electrical
heaters to stabilize the initial temperature.
Humidification (optional)—The humidifier creates steam, which is distributed into the air stream
via the steam distribution pipe. (See also Appendix A - Humidifier—600mm (24") Units Only).
The Liebert CRV's humidification is activated when the measured temperature and humidity sensor
has been calculated to exceed the corresponding dew point setpoint. The dew point setpoint is
calculated based on the temperature and humidity of the sensor set to control the control setpoint and
relative humidity.
Example: Temperature Setpoint 72°F / Humidity Setpoint 50% = 52°F Dew Point
NOTE
The Liebert iCOM® control monitors the condition of the air discharging from the unit to
protect neighboring electronic equipment. Liebert iCOM will prevent the humidifier from
activating if the discharge air is near its saturation point. This protects against discharging
fog from the unit or condensation forming on the unit's supply air baffles. This protection mode
is activated when the supply sensor reading is below 53°F (11.7°C) or above 55% relative
humidity. When this condition is met a message will display showing “humidifier” suspended.
The status of the humidifier lockout can be viewed in the Service/Diagnostics menu.
These protections do not apply to the external humidifier output.

Operation
14.1 Alarms/Events
The following alarms and events are supported by the Liebert iCOM® control on the Liebert CRV.
When an alarm is triggered the alarm sounds, the LED will flash red, an event will be written to the
Event Log and the BMS will be notified. If the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm will silence and the
LED will turn solid red. When the alarm condition is resolved, the LED lights green and the BMS
alarm notification is reset.
BMS Disconnected Heaters Overheated Power Off Unit 10 Disconnected
Bottom Fan Failure High CW Temp Power On Unit 11 Disconnected
Call Service High Return Humidity Rack Sensor 1 Failure Unit 12 Disconnected
Clogged Filters High Return Temperature Rack Sensor 10 Failure Unit 13 Disconnected
Comp 1 High Pressure High Supply Temperature Rack Sensor 2 Failure Unit 14 Disconnected
Comp 1 Hrs Exceeded High Temperature Rack Sensor 3 Failure Unit 15 Disconnected
Comp 1 Low Pressure Hp Transducer 1 Fail Rack Sensor 4 Failure Unit 16 Disconnected
Comp 1 Pumpdown Fail Hum Disabled Rack Sensor 5 Failure Unit 17 Disconnected
Comp 1 Short Cycle Hum Enabled Rack Sensor 6 Failure Unit 18 Disconnected
Comp Power Reduction Hum Hrs Exceeded Rack Sensor 7 Failure Unit 19 Disconnected
Compressor(S) Lockout Humidifier Cylinder Worn Rack Sensor 8 Failure Unit 20 Disconnected
Cond Pump-High Water Humidifier High Amps Rack Sensor 9 Failure Unit 21 Disconnected
Condenser 1 Failure Humidifier Lockout RAM / Battery Fail Unit 22 Disconnected
Control Valve Failure Humidifier Low Amps Reheat Lockout Unit 23 Disconnected
Customer Input 1 Humidifier Low Water Room Humidity Problem Unit 24 Disconnected
Customer Input 2 Humidifier Problem Room Sensor Failure Unit 25 Disconnected
Customer Input 3 Loss of Airflow Smoke Detected Unit 26 Disconnected
Customer Input 4 Loss of CW Flow Standby Mode Unit 27 Disconnected
Dehum Disabled Loss of Flow Supply Sensor Failure Unit 28 Disconnected
Dehum Disabled 12hrs Loss of Power System Off Confirmed Unit 29 Disconnected
Dehum Enabled Low Memory 1 System Off Requested Unit 30 Disconnected
Dehum Hrs Exceeded Low Return Humidity Top Fan Failure Unit 31 Disconnected
Dig Scroll1 High Temp Low Supply Temperature Unit 01 Disconnected Unit 32 Disconnected
Dscroll 1 Sensor Fail LP Transducer 1 Fail Unit 02 Disconnected Unit Code Missing
El Heat1 Hrs Exceeded Lwd Sensor Fail Unit 03 Disconnected Unit Disabled
Fire Alarm Maintenance Done Unit 04 Disconnected Unit Hrs Exceeded
Fluid Sensor Failure Maintenance to be Done! Unit 05 Disconnected Unit Off
General Alarm Network Failure Unit 06 Disconnected Unit On
HCB Not Connected No Connection w/Unit1 Unit 07 Disconnected Unit Shut Down
Heat Rej TVSS No Power Unit 08 Disconnected Water Under Floor
Heat Rej VFD On-Off Key Disabled Unit 09 Disconnected

Operation
Table 37 Liebert CRV™ - Glossary

Controller Liebert iCOM® v4
Data Label Data Description
Sensor from which air temperature measurements will be used for cooling
Air Temperature Control Sensor
and heating control.
Value that is divided evenly to form a temperature range above and below
Air Temperature Dead Band [Air Temperature Set Point]. If measured air temperature is within this
range, no heating or cooling will occur.
Desired air temperature. This set point is dependent upon which sensor is
Air Temperature Set Point
selected for control.
If power is lost, the control will delay this amount of time after power is
Auto Restart Delay
restored before restarting the unit.
Building Management System (or external monitoring system) has not
BMS Communications Timeout
communicated with the system within the expected timeframe.
Timeframe within which the Building Management System (or external
BMS Timeout Period
monitoring system) must communicate with the system to avoid a timeout.
Bottom Fan Issue The bottom fan is not operating within its normal parameters.
Calculated month of the next scheduled maintenance. Used in conjunction
Calculated Next Maintenance Month
with [Calculated Next Maintenance Year].
Calculated year of the next scheduled maintenance. Used in conjunction
Calculated Next Maintenance Year
with [Calculated Next Maintenance Month].
Chilled water valve out of position. Chilled water control valve position does
Chilled Water Control Valve Failure
not match expected value.
Clogged Air Filter Air filter is dirty and needs to be (cleaned or) replaced.
Compressor 1 High Head Pressure Compressor 1 high head pressure
Compressor 1 High Pressure Transducer Compressor 1 high pressure transducer is disconnected or the signal is out
Issue of range.
Compressor 1 Hours Exceeded Operating hours for compressor 1 have exceeded the threshold.
Compressor 1 Low Pressure Transducer Compressor 1 low pressure transducer is disconnected or the signal is out
Issue of range.
Compressor 1 Low Suction Pressure Compressor 1 low suction pressure.
Unable to pump down suction-side pressure during compressor 1
Compressor 1 Pump Down Issue
shutdown.
Compressor 1 short cycle. A short cycle is defined as turning on and off a
Compressor 1 Short Cycle
number of times over a set time period.
Condenser 1 Issue Condenser 1 is not operating within its normal parameters.
One or more unspecified condenser circuit events active. See local unit
Condenser Circuit Unspecified General Event
display for further details.
Condenser Control Board Issue The condenser control board is reporting an issue.
Condenser Fan Issue Condenser fan is not operating within its operational parameters.
Condenser Low Noise Mode - Full Days Days of the week selected for low noise mode full day scheduling.
Condenser Low Noise Mode - Interval Days Days of the week selected for low noise mode interval scheduling.
Condenser Low Noise Mode Max Fan Speed Maximum fan speed when condenser is placed in low noise mode.
Condenser Low Noise Mode Schedule
Enable/disable scheduled control of condenser low noise mode.
Control
Condenser Low Noise Mode Start Time The time of day at which the condenser will transition into low noise mode.
Condenser Low Noise Mode State State of condenser low noise mode scheduler control.
The time of day at which the condenser will transition out of low noise
Condenser Low Noise Mode Stop Time
mode.
Fan speed exceeding the maximum set point in order to alleviate a high
Condenser Max Fan Speed Override
temperature or pressure condition.
Condenser Normal Mode Max Fan Speed Maximum fan speed when condenser is not in low noise mode.
Condenser Outside Air Temp Out of [Condenser Outside Air Temperature] is either above an upper threshold or
Operating Range below a lower threshold.
Condenser outside air temperature sensor is disconnected or the signal is
Condenser Outside Air Temp Sensor Issue
out of range.

Operation
Table 37 Liebert CRV™ - Glossary (continued)

Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Over
Condenser refrigerant pressure has exceeded a threshold.
Threshold
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Condenser refrigerant pressure sensor is disconnected or the signal is out
Issue of range.
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Under
Condenser refrigerant pressure has dropped below a threshold.
Threshold
Condenser Supply Refrigerant Over Temp Condenser supply refrigerant temperature has exceeded a threshold.
Condenser Supply Refrigerant Temp Sensor Condenser supply refrigerant temperature sensor is disconnected or the
Issue signal is out of range.
Condenser supply refrigerant temperature has dropped below a specified
Condenser Supply Refrigerant Under Temp
threshold.
Condenser TVSS Issue The condenser Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor device has failed.
One or more unspecified condenser unit events active. See local unit
Condenser Unit Unspecified General Event
display for further details.
Condenser VFD Issue The condenser fan Variable Frequency Drive is offline.
Cooling Capacity (Primary) Compressor utilization or chilled water valve position, based on unit type.
Temperature control band above [Air Temperature Set Point]. If measured
Cooling Proportional Band air temperature is within this band, cooling operations are proportionally
controlled.
Customer Input 1 Customer Input 1.
Customer Input 2 Customer input 2.
Humidity control band above [Humidity Set Point]. If measured humidity is
Dehumidification Proportional Band
within this band, dehumidification operations are proportionally controlled.
Dehumidifier Hours Exceeded Operating hours for the dehumidifier have exceeded the threshold.
Present dehumidifier utilization expressed as a percentage of the maximum
Dehumidifier Utilization
rated capacity.
Digital scroll compressor 1 shut off because its head temperature has
Dig Scroll Comp 1 Over Temp
exceeded the upper threshold.
Digital scroll compressor 1 temperature sensor is disconnected or the
Dig Scroll Comp 1 Temp Sensor Issue
signal is out of range.
Electric Reheater Hours Exceeded Operating hours for electric reheater have exceeded the threshold.
Ext Compressor Lockout The compressor is shut down and disabled by an external input signal.
High water is detected in the condenser, as indicated by an external input
Ext Condenser Pump High Water
signal.
Ext Humidifier Lockout The humidifier is shut down and disabled by an external input signal.
Ext Loss of Flow Loss of flow is detected, as indicated by an external input signal.
A temperature has exceeded its threshold, as indicated by an external input
Ext Over Temperature
signal.
Ext Reheat Lockout The reheater is shut down and disabled by an external input signal.
Ext Standby Glycol Pump On The standby glycol pump is on, as indicated by an external input signal.
External Fire Detected Fire detected, as indicated by an external input signal.
Fan control mode. Allowable modes are: (0) Auto - Fan speed is controlled
Fan Control Mode via the selected fan control sensor, and, (1) Manual - Fan will operate at a
fixed speed.
Sensor from which air temperature measurements will be used for fan
Fan Control Sensor
speed control.
Fan Hours Exceeded Operating hours for the unit blower fan have exceeded the threshold.
Fan Speed Manual Set Point Manual fan speed.
Fan Speed Maximum Set Point Maximum fan speed.
Fan Speed Minimum Set Point Minimum fan speed.

Operation

Temperature control band above the temperature set point calculated for
Fan Speed Proportional Band proportional fan speed control. If measured air temperature is within this
band, fan speed operations are proportionally controlled.
Fan Speed Fan speed expressed as a percentage of the maximum rated speed.
Temperature control band below [Air Temperature Set Point]. If measured
Heating Proportional Band air temperature is within this band, heating operations are proportionally
controlled.
High Power Shutdown Supply to high power components has been shutdown.
High Return Humidity Threshold Threshold value used in the [High Return Humidity] event.
High Return Humidity Return air high humidity event.
Humidity control band below [Humidity Set Point]. If measured humidity is
Humidification Proportional Band
within this band, humidification operations are proportionally controlled.
Humidifier control board is required to be connected, but no signal is
Humidifier Control Board Not Detected
detected.
Humidifier Cylinder Worn Humidifier cylinder is not operating properly and needs to be replaced.
Humidifier Hours Exceeded Operating hours for the humidifier have exceeded the threshold.
Humidifier Issue Humidifier issue detected, causing it to be locked out.
Humidifier Low Water The water level in the humidifier has dropped below its threshold.
Humidifier Over Current The electrical current to the humidifier has exceeded its upper threshold.
The electrical current to the humidifier has dropped below its lower
Humidifier Under Current
threshold.
Present humidifier utilization expressed as a percentage of the maximum
Humidifier Utilization
rated capacity.
Value that is divided evenly to form a range above and below [Humidity Set
Humidity Dead Band Point]. If measured humidity is within this range, no humidification or
dehumidification will occur.
Humidity Set Point Desired relative humidity.
Loss of Air Flow No air flow through the unit due to failure of all fans.
Low Return Humidity Threshold Threshold value used in the [Low Return Humidity] event.
Low Return Humidity Return air low humidity event.
Maintenance Completed Maintenance has been completed on the unit.
Maintenance Due The calculated maintenance date has been reached.
The ratio of operations performed to the calculated operations available
Maintenance Ramp
between maintenance intervals.
Master Unit Communication Lost Communication with master unit has been lost.
The ratio of cooling energy provided to the amount of total energy being
Operating Efficiency
used.
RAM Battery Issue RAM or RAM backup battery is not operating correctly.
Present reheating utilization expressed as a percentage of the maximum
Reheat Utilization
rated capacity.
Reheater Over Temperature The temperature of the reheater has exceeded its threshold.
Remote Sensor Average Temperature Average value of remote sensor temperature measurements.
Function assigned to remote sensor. Available values are: (0) Control -
sensor will be used in calculation of remote sensor temperature that may
Remote Sensor Function be used for heating and cooling control, (1) Reference - sensor will not be
used in calculation of remote sensor temperature, but is enabled, (2)
Disable - sensor is disabled
Remote Sensor Issue Remote sensor is disconnected or the signal is out of range.
Remote Sensor Maximum Temperature Maximum value of remote sensor temperature measurements.
Remote Sensor Minimum Temperature Minimum value of remote sensor temperature measurements.
Calculation method applied to temperature readings from the remote
Remote Sensor Temperature Calculation sensors to determine a single temperature measurement value for cooling
and heating control.
Remote Sensor Temperature Air temperature as measured by remote sensor.

Operation

Return Air Over Temp Threshold Threshold value used in the [Return Air Over Temperature] event.
Return Air Over Temperature Return air high temperature event.
The air sensor at the inlet of the unit is disconnected or the signal is out of
Return Air Sensor Issue
range.
Return Air Temperature The temperature of the inlet air
Return Dew Point Dew point temperature measured at the inlet of the unit.
[Return Humidity] has exceeded the upper limit of [Dehumidification
Return Humidity Out Of Proportional Band Proportional Band], or has dropped below the lower limit of [Humidification
Proportional Band] ], for an extended period of time.
Return Humidity Relative humidity measured at the inlet of the unit.
Server Class The general classification for this system
Service Required Unit requires servicing.
System lost power. This event becomes active when the unit is powered on
Shutdown - Loss Of Power following an unexpected loss of power. This event remains active for 90
minutes.
Smoke Detected Smoke detected.
Supply Air Over Temp Threshold Threshold value used in the [Supply Air Over Temperature] event.
Supply Air Over Temperature Supply air high temperature event.
The air sensor at the outlet of the unit is disconnected or the signal is out of
Supply Air Sensor Issue
range.
Supply Air Temperature Air temperature measured at the outlet of the unit.
Supply Air Under Temp Threshold Threshold value used in the [Supply Air Under Temperature] event.
Supply Air Under Temperature Supply air low temperature event.
Supply Chilled Water Loss of Flow Supply chilled water flow is too low.
Supply Chilled Water Over Temp Threshold Threshold value used in the [Supply Chilled Water Over Temp] event.
[Supply Chilled Water Temperature] has exceeded [Supply Chilled Water
Supply Chilled Water Over Temp
Over Temp Threshold].
Supply Chilled Water Temperature Supply chilled water temperature.
The supply fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or the signal is out of
Supply Fluid Temp Sensor Issue
range.
Supply Humidity Relative humidity at the outlet of the unit.
System Control Mode System control mode.
System Date and Time The system date and time
System Event Acknowledge/Reset Reset and/or acknowledge all events.
System On/Off Control Turn system functionality on or off.
System Operating State Reason The reason the system is in the current operating state.
System Operating State Current operating state of the system.
System Status The operating status for the system
Top Fan Issue The top fan is not operating within its normal parameters.
Unit Off Unit was turned off.
Unit On Unit was turned on.
An event has occurred requiring some system components to be shutdown
Unit Partial Shutdown
and disabled.
An event has occurred requiring the unit to be shutdown and disabled to
Unit Shutdown
prevent damage to the system.
Unit Standby Unit was placed in standby mode.
One or more unspecified events active. See local unit display for further
Unspecified General Event
details.
The water leakage detector sensor is disconnected or the signal is out of
Water Leakage Detector Sensor Issue
range.
Water Under Floor Water under the floor is detected.

Calibration and Regulation after Startup
15.0 CALIBRATION AND REGULATION AFTER STARTUP

The Liebert CRV has been factory-tested and calibrated, but it is very important to check, at startup,
the superheating of the thermostatic valve (A/W versions).
• For calibrations of instruments installed on the external condensers/drycoolers, refer to the
manual for the equipment.
• For control system calibrations, refer to the Liebert iCOM® manual, SL-18835. (To prevent erratic
operation, do not use temperature and relative humidity setpoints/proportional bands that differ
excessively from the default settings.)
15.1 Thermostatic Expansion Valve

The Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TEV) performs one function: It keeps the evaporator supplied
with enough refrigerant to satisfy load conditions. It does not effect compressor operation.
Proper valve operation can be determined by measuring superheat. The correct superheat setting is
between 10 and 20°F (-12 and -6°C). If too little refrigerant is being fed to the evaporator, the
superheat will be high; if too much refrigerant is being supplied, the superheat will be low.
15.1.1 Determine Suction Superheat

To determine superheat:
1. Measure the temperature of the suction line at the point the TEV bulb is clamped.
2. Obtain the gauge pressure at the compressor suction valve.
3. Add the estimated pressure drop between the bulb’s location and the suction valve.
4. Convert the sum of the two pressures to the equivalent temperature.
5. Subtract this temperature from the actual suction line temperature. The difference is superheat.
15.1.2 Adjust Superheat Setting with the TEV

To adjust the superheat setting:
1. Remove the valve cap at the bottom of the valve.
2. Turn the adjusting stem counterclockwise to lower the superheat.
3. Turn the adjusting stem clockwise to increase the superheat.
NOTE
Make no more than one turn of the stem at a time. As long as thirty minutes may be required
for the new balance to take place.
15.2 Environmental Protection

Misuse or incorrect calibration of the unit leads to increased energy consumption, resulting in
economic and environmental damage.
15.3 Calibrating Electrical Components

Table 38 Calibrating electrical components
Refrigeration Circuit
Item No. Component Setting Notes Contact
High Pressure Range 045 barg
18-19 —
Transducer Output 05V See Liebert iCOM®
Low Pressure Range 017.3 barg User Manual, SL-18835
14 —
Transducer Output 05V
STOP 38.7±1 barg
High Pressure Normally
3 START 30.0±1.5 barg Reset
Switch (HP) Closed
(fixed setting manual reset)
Clogged Filter
Setpoint range 0.54 mbar Normally
— Differential Pressure Setting Ring
Filter G4 = 2 mbar Closed
Switch (CF)

Maintenance
16.0 MAINTENANCE
16.1 Safety Instructions

All maintenance operations must strictly observe national, state and local accident prevention
regulations, especially the regulations concerning electrical systems, refrigerators and manufacturing
resources.
Air conditioning equipment maintenance may be performed only by authorized properly trained and
qualified personnel.
To keep all warranties valid, the maintenance must adhere to the manufacturer’s regulations.
! WARNING
the electric control enclosure.
mode.
! WARNING
Risk of contact with rotating fan blades and extremely hot and/or cold surfaces. Can cause
equipment damage, injury and death.
Disconnect all local and remote electric power supplies before working within the electric
connection enclosures. Perform maintenance only when the system is de-energized, all fan
blades have stopped rotating and component temperatures have become safe for human
contact.
• Turn Off the system by switching it Off at the controller and the main disconnect switch.
• Post a warning sign saying Do not switch on.
• Electrical components of the unit must be switched Off and checked using a voltmeter to
ensure they are not receiving electrical input power.
! WARNING
Keep hair, jewelry and loose clothing secured and away from rotating fan blades during
operation.
NOTICE
Risk of improper maintenance. Can cause equipment damage.
All maintenance must be performed only by authorized properly trained and qualified
personnel.
Ignoring safety instructions can be dangerous to persons as well as to the environment. Soiled
parts always cause a loss of performance and, for switch or control devices, can lead to the
breakdown of a plant.

Maintenance
16.2 Facility Fluid and Piping Maintenance for Water and Glycol Systems
Maintaining facility water and glycol quality is required throughout the life of the coolant fluid piping
system. Fluid and piping system maintenance schedules must be established and performed. A
coolant fluid maintenance program must be established that will evaluate fluid chemistry and apply
necessary treatment. The complexity of water/glycol solution condition problems and the variations of
required treatment programs make it extremely important to obtain the advice of a competent and
Perform periodic inspections of the facility and the unit coil and/or heat exchanger and coolant fluid
piping system for leaks and visible damage.
16.3 Glycol Solution Maintenance

It is difficult to establish a specific schedule of inhibitor maintenance since the rate of inhibitor
depletion depends upon local water conditions. Analysis of water samples at the time of installation
and through a maintenance program should help to establish a pattern of depletion. A visual
inspection of the solution and filter residue is often helpful in judging whether active corrosion is
occurring.
The complexity of water/glycol solution condition problems and the variations of required treatment
programs make it extremely important to obtain the advice of a competent and experienced water
treatment specialist and follow a regularly scheduled coolant fluid system maintenance program. It is
important to note that improper use of water treatment chemicals can cause problems more serious
than using none. Proper inhibitor maintenance must be performed in order to prevent corrosion of the
glycol system. Consult the glycol manufacturer for testing and maintenance of inhibitors. Do not mix
products from different manufacturers.
16.4 Spare Parts

Only original spare parts made by Emerson Network Power may be used. Using third-party material
can invalidate the warranty. When making seeking technical assistance, always refer to the
component list supplied with the equipment, and specify the model number, serial number and, if
available, the part number.
NOTE
1. When replacing a faulty component, follow the relevant manufacturer instructions.
2. When the spare parts must be brazed, be careful not to damage the internal parts (gaskets,
seals, O-rings, etc.).
16.5 Maintenance Schedule

Conduct monthly, quarterly, biannual and annual checks according to the following guidelines.
All tasks and time periods listed here are the manufacturers’ regulations and must be documented in
an inspection report.

Maintenance
Table 39 Maintenance schedule

Maintenance Period
Monthly Every Every
Component By User 3 Months 6 Months Annually
Check unit display for clogged-filter warning X
Check for irregular noise from unit fans X
General Check for irregular noise from compressor (if
X
applicable)
Check for irregular noise from remote
X
condenser fan(s) (if applicable)
Check state of filters X
Filters Replace air filter if necessary X
Check filter switch functionality X
Verify impellers move freely X
Check bearings X
Blowers
Check motor mounts for tightness X
Check fan safety switch X
Check condition of contacts X
Check electrical connections X
Electrical/Electronics
Check operation of controller X
Check unit operation sequence X
Check cylinder and pan X
Steam-Generating
Check condition of steam hoses X
Humidifier
Verify filling solenoid valve is operating properly X
Check circuit for leakage/general condition X
Check water (glycol) inlet temperature X
Cooling Water Circuit
(Water/Glycol and Check water regulating valve operation X
Chilled Water Units)
Check in/out water (glycol) Δt X
Check mixture glycol level (if applicable) X
Check compressor noise/vibrations X
Check oil level through compressor sight glass X
Adjust/tighten compressor/functional elements X
Check sight glass for problem detection X
Refrigerating Circuit Check starting/running amps X
Check refrigerating circuit main pressures X
Check compressor suction superheat X
Check discharge temperature X
Check subcooling X
Check fan bearings X
Check fan motor mounts for tightness X
Air-Cooled
Condenser/Drycooler Check coil condition X
(if applicable)
Check pipeline supports X
Check fan speed controller operation X
Water/Glycol Pump See manual for the pump

Maintenance
16.6 Inspect and Replace the Air Filters—600mm (24") Models

Check the air filter monthly to maintain efficient air distribution through the evaporator coil.
! WARNING
Risk of contact with high speed rotating fan blades. Can cause serious injury or death.
Open all local and remote electric power disconnect switches, verify with a voltmeter that
power is Off and verify that the fan blades have stopped rotating before opening the cabinet
door.
1. Switch Off the CRV.

2. Open the rear panel by rotating the three locks with a screwdriver.
3. Wait until the fans stop rotating. When you open the first lock, you also open a safety switch that
cuts the input power; see Figure 136 below.
Figure 136 Air filter location and input power safety switch—600mm (24") models
Air Filter
Safety
Switches
Safety Switch
To extract the filters (refer to Figure 137:

1. Push up the upper filter.
2. Pull the bottom of the filter away from the Liebert CRV.
3. Pull it out of the unit.
4. Lift the lower filter up
5. Pull the bottom of the filter away from the Liebert CRV.
6. Pull it out of the unit.

Maintenance
Figure 137 Remove the air filters—600mm (24") models

Upper Filter Lower Filter
Support Bar
Support Bar
Retaining Screw
Push the upper filter up, pull the Slide the lower filter up beyond the support
bottom away from the Liebert CRV and bar and lift it out of the Liebert CRV the
lift it out of the unit same way as the upper filter
After cleaning or replacing the filter and before reassembling the unit, check that the air differential
pressure switch pipes (clogged filter alarm) are in the correct position and order. Check also that the
drain trays are clean and the pipe secure.
Figure 138 Differential pressure switch tubes—600mm (24") models
Differential
pressure
switch tube
Before restarting the unit, be sure that the Liebert CRV’s door is properly closed. If it is ajar, the
microswitches on the door will keep the unit in safety status.

Maintenance
16.7 Inspect and Replace the Air Filters—300mm (12") Models

Check the air filter monthly to maintain efficient air distribution through the evaporator coil.
1. Switch Off the CRV.
2. Open the rear door. The filters are just inside the door.
3. If the filters appear dirty, loosen the brackets holding the upper filter in place and remove the
filter.
4. Repeat Step 3 for the bottom filter.
5. Replace the lower filter, securing it with the adjustable brackets.
6. Replace the upper filter, securing it with the adjustable brackets.
Figure 139 Remove the air filters 300mm (12") models
Upper
Air
Filter
Brackets like this fit in slot around

the rear door of the 300mm (12")
models, securing filters
Lower
Air
Filter
After cleaning or replacing the filter and before reassembling the unit, check that the air differential
pressure switch tube (clogged filter alarm) are correctly installed. Also verify that the drain trays are
clean and the pipe is secure.

Maintenance
Figure 140 Differential pressure switch components, 300mm (12") DX models
Differential
Pressure
Sampling
Point
Differential
Pressure
Switch

Maintenance
16.8 Condensate Drain and Condensate Pump Systems

16.8.1 Condensate Drain
Check for and clear obstructions in tubing during routine maintenance.
16.8.2 Condensate Pump, Dual-Float

Figure 141 Condensate pump
Condensate
Pump
600mm (24") Models

300mm (12") DX Models
1. Disconnect power to the unit using the disconnect switch.
2. Check for and clear obstructions in gravity lines leading to the condensate pump.
3. Remove the sump, clean with a stiff nylon brush and flush with water.
4. Inspect and clear clogs in the discharge check valve and float mechanism.
5. Reassemble and check for leaks.
16.9 Air-Cooled Condenser and Drycoolers

1. Clear the coil surface of all debris that might inhibit airflow.
2. Check for and correct bent or damaged coil fins.
3. Do not permit snow to accumulate around or under an outdoor unit.
4. Consider having the coil surface commercially cleaned periodically.
5. Inspect fans, motors and controls for proper operation.
6. Check all piping and capillaries for proper support.
7. Inspect for leaks.
16.10 Electrical Heaters

1. Inspect and clean reheat elements.
2. Inspect and tighten support hardware.

Maintenance
16.11 Replace a Fan

16.11.1Fan Replacement on 600mm (24") Models
Refer to Figure 142 for the fan assembly components.
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock and contact with high speed rotating fans. Can cause injury or death.
Open all local and remote electric power disconnect switches, verify that power is off with a
voltmeter and verify that all fans have stopped rotating before working inside the unit cabinet
or disconnecting the fan power wires.
1. Shut off all power to the unit by closing the main disconnect switch on the electrical panel on the
rear of the Liebert CRV.
2. Open the front door.
3. Open the panel assembly that contains the fans, using the quarter-turn latches.
4. Disconnect the fan’s power connections in the electrical junction box.
5. Remove the fan frame assembly by removing the bolts in the corner; there are four bolts at each
corner.
6. Set the fan assembly in a work area.
7. Remove the four bolts attaching the fan to be replaced to the fan frame assembly.
8. Reverse the steps to install the replacement fan.
Figure 142 Liebert CRV fan assembly components

Fan Assembly
Fan Assembly for 600mm (24")
Corner Brace Models Shown
with Four Bolts
Fan Mounting Plate
(four bolts attach fan
Fan
Electrical
Junction
Fan Assembly Box
Corner Brace Electrical Junction Box
with Four Bolts
Fan
Fan
Fan
Electrical
Wire Entry
Two Bolts Each

Side of Fan

Maintenance
16.12 Considerations when Dismantling the Unit

The Liebert CRV has been designed and built to ensure continuous operation.
The working life of some of the main components, such as the fan and the compressor, depends on
proper maintenance.
NOTICE
Risk of release of hazardous substances into the environment. Can cause environmental
pollution and violation of environmental regulations.
The Liebert CRV contains substances and components hazardous for the environment
(electronic components, refrigerating gases and oils). At the end of its useful life, the
Liebert CRV must be dismantled by specialized refrigerating technicians. The unit must be
delivered to suitable centers specializing in the collection and disposal of equipment
containing hazardous substances.
The refrigerating fluid and the lubricating oil inside the circuit must be recovered according to the
laws in the relevant country.
To recover the gas, use all the connections described in 6.0 Refrigerant Connections for Air-
Cooled Units.
16.13 F-Gas Regulation (EC) No. 842/2006

Stationary air conditioning placed in the European Community market and operating with
fluorinated greenhouse gases (F-gas), such as R-134A, R-407C and R-410A, must comply with the F-
gas Regulation (applied since July 4, 2007).
Following considerations must be observed when operating with the above-mentioned equipment:
• Fluorinated greenhouse gases are covered by the Kyoto Protocol.
• The fluorinated greenhouse gases in this equipment should not be vented to the atmosphere.
• Referring to the value noted in Annex I of Regulation (EC) No 842/2006, the following list
specifies the global warming potential (GWP) of some major F-gases:
• R-134A: GWP 1300
• R-407C: GWP 1610
• R-410A: GWP 1890
• Operators of the above-mentioned applications, which contain fluorinated greenhouse gases,
shall, using all measures that are technically feasible and do not entail disproportionate cost:
a. prevent leakage of these gases and, as soon as possible, repair any detected leakage;
b. ensure that they are checked for leakage by certified personnel;
c. ensure arrangements are put in place for the proper recovery by certified personnel.
d. In case of applications containing 3 kg (6 kg in case of hermetically sealed systems) or more of
F-gases, certified personnel and companies (according to Reg. 303/2008) provide regular leak
testing (according to Reg. 1516/2007 and Reg. 1497/2007) and maintain records of
maintenance activities in a dedicated log book.
e. Recovery for the purpose of recycling, reclamation or destruction of the fluorinated
greenhouse gases, pursuant to Art. 4 (Recovery) of Reg.842/2006, shall take place before the
final disposal of that equipment and, when appropriate, during its servicing and
maintenance.
• Operator, according to Reg. 842/2006, Article 2, point 6, means the natural or legal person
exercising actual power over the technical functioning of the equipment and system covered by
the Regulation. The State may, in defined, specific situations, designate the owner as being
responsible for the operator's obligations.
• Direct methods of leakage checking approved by the manufacturer (Reg. 1516/2007 and Reg.
1497/2007):
a. gas detection device adapted to the refrigerant in the system; the sensitivity of portable gas
detection devices (as a direct test method) shall be at least five grams per year.
b. proprietary bubble solutions / soapsuds.

Maintenance
• Additional information located in a dedicated label of the unit (Reg. 1494/2007):

a. Where fluorinated greenhouse gas is foreseen to be added to the equipment outside of the
manufacturing site at the point of installation, a dedicated label accommodates notation of
both the quantity (kg) pre-charged in the manufacturing plant and the quantity charged at
the installation site, as well as the resulting total quantity of F-gas as a combination of the
above-mentioned quantities, in a manner that conforms to legibility and indelibility.
Our split units are usually not pre-charged at the factory; in this case, the total quantity of
refrigerant charged in the unit must be written in the relevant label, during the commission-
ing operation at the installation site.
b. Our packaged units (not split) operating with F-gas are usually fully charged at the factory,
and the total amount of refrigerant charge is already reported on the label. In this case, the
label has no need of further written information.
c. In general, the above-mentioned information has been located in the main nameplate of the
relevant unit.
d. For equipment with double refrigeration circuits, in regards to different requirements based
on the quantity of F-gas contained, the required information about refrigerant charge
quantities must be listed separately for each individual circuit.
e. For equipment with separate indoor and outdoor sections connected by refrigerant piping, the
label information will be on that part of the equipment that is initially charged with the
refrigerant. In case of a split system (separate indoor and outdoor sections) without a factory
precharge of refrigerant, the mandatory label information will be on that part of the product
or equipment that contains the most suitable service points for charging or recovering the
fluorinated greenhouse gas(es).
• Safety data sheets of F-gases used into the products are available on demand.

Troubleshooting
17.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 40 Unit diagnostics
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
Dirty filters Replace filters
Filter clog sensor failure Call Emerson Network Power®
Incorrect positioning of remote Verify that remote temperature sensors are correctly
temperature sensor(s) positioned
Verify CANbus cable connections and CANbus termination

are correct.
Remote temperature sensor(s) issue

Adjust remote sensor mode(max/average) and number of
sensors calculated in average.
Contact your local Emerson representative

Chilled water units: inlet water
Check cooling water temperature
temperature is too high
Rack temperature Refrigerating circuit charge issue Contact your local Emerson representative
is too high Verify unit positioning/room configuration
Cold air short-cycling issues Verify unit air baffles set-up
Verify cold aisle containment seals (if applicable)
Insufficient room-cooling capacity Reduce rack heat load or add cooling units
Chilled water-regulating valve issue Contact your local Emerson representative
Unit safety device tripped Contact your local Emerson representative
Verify air temperature setpoint and temperature control

sensor reading
Verify suction pressure in the service menus, diagnostic
Compressor will not load service icon with the compressor loaded to 100%. If the
suction drops below 109 psi (7.5 bar), the compressor
capacity will decrease to help build suction. Verify suction
transducer reading is correct compared with a manifold
gauge.
Verify suction pressure in the service menus, diagnostic

service icon with the compressor loaded to 100%. If the
suction drops below 109 psi (7.5 bar), the fan speed will
Low pressure condition detected increase to help build suction. Verify suction transducer
Evaporator Fans reading is correct compared with a manifold gauge.
will not modulate
from 100% Contact your local Emerson representative
See 11.3 Liebert CRV Operation—Liebert iCOM Control

Fan control not properly set

Troubleshooting

Air-cooled units: Verify that remote condenser fan(s) are

running
Check accuracy of transducer by attaching a manifold

Capacity Reduced gauge to discharge side of compressor. Compare gauge
due to HP Alarm Condensing pressure (head pressure) has reading to what is shown in Service Menus, Diagnostic
(Comp Reduced by exceeded 493 psig (34 bar) service mode.
HP)
Water/glycol units: Check cooling water supply
Water/glycol units: Check cooling water temp
Contact Emerson Network Power
Verify sensor reading in User Menu, Sensor Data.
Digital Scroll
Sensor disconnected Check plug connections
Sensor Failure
Low return temperature Place a unit into standby (if applicable)
Install blanking panels in open areas of racks. Consult your

local Emerson representative.
Low Supply
Temperature Alarm/ Poor airflow
Room Overcooling Direct discharge baffles to heat source
Supply chilled water temperature too low. Check cooling water temperature
Humidifier Suspended message. See 11.3.5 Humidification

Check fault LED on humidifier PCB enclosure.
Humidifier problem alarm.
Low Room See A.1.6 Humidifier Troubleshooting
Humidity
Room humidity has exceeded the humidity control band
Room Humidity Problem for 36 hours straight. Verify setpoints and confirm room is
properly sealed.
The operated in dehumidification for excessive time.

Dehum Suspended message Dehumidifcation is suspended to prevent condensation for
forming on accent panels and other areas.
High Room
Humidity
Room humidity has been below the humidity control band
Room Humidity Problem for 36 hours straight. Verify setpoints and confirm room is
properly sealed.
Fan is faulty Contact your local Emerson representative
Confirm rear door switches are made
Unit fan fails

Confirm fan contactor is pulled in
to start
Top or Bottom Fan Failure Alarm
Confirm line voltage is present at the fan

Troubleshooting

Room humidity is over acceptable limit Check room condition
Water drops carried
Condensate pan drain is clogged Contact your local Emerson representative
by airflow
Problem with humidifier control Contact your local Emerson representative
Unit is not properly leveled Adjust the leveling feet
Unit condensate drain pipe is clogged Remove pipe obstruction
Chilled water and water/glycol units: leak
Locate and repair the leak
Water on the floor in the water circuit
around the unit Piping insulation broken/damaged Restore insulation integrity
Leak in the draining circuit Contact your local Emerson representative
Condensate pump is faulty Contact your local Emerson representative
Leak in the humidifier filling hose Contact your local Emerson representative
Incorrect positioning of remote
Verify correct positioning of temperature sensors
temperature sensor(s)
Unsteady air Unbalanced heat load distribution Redistribute rack heat load
delivery Remote temperature sensor(s) issue Contact your local Emerson representative
temperature
Faulty temperature sensor(s) Contact your local Emerson representative
Unit controller issue Contact your local Emerson representative
Local display is not Local display cable disconnected Connect cable

operational but unit Local display cable damaged Replace cable
operates Local display configuration lost Contact your local Emerson representative
Unit electrical supply is Off Restore electrical supply
Local display is not Unit main switch is Off Switch On the unit
operational and unit
does not operate Control board supply issue Contact your local Emerson representative
Control board issue Contact your local Emerson representative
Table 41 Liebert iCOM® medium control board DIPswitch settings

Compressorized
CRV Models
DIPswitch CR019, CR020 Chilled Water
Number and CR035 Model-CR040
1 On Off
2 Off Off
3 On Off
4 Off Off
5 Off Off
6 Off Off
7 Off On
8 On On

Humidifier—600mm (24") Units Only
APPENDIX A - HUMIDIFIER—600MM (24") UNITS ONLY

A.1 PRINCIPAL OF OPERATION
When the Liebert iCOM® calls, the cylinder fills to 100% of the Full Load Amperage (FLA) or to the
top of the cylinder, whichever comes first. See Figure 143. If it reaches 100% FLA, the water heats
and boils away to a level giving 80% FLA. An electronic timer uses the rate of amp fall to determine
the water level. The objective is to concentrate current carrying minerals in the cylinder so that a
smaller volume of water is required to produce the rated steam output. This extends the life of the
disposable cylinder by minimizing electrode coverage and reducing energy use because the high
concentration allows a minimal drain rate. When 80% FLA is reached, the fill valve will open,
refilling the cylinder to 100% FLA. On occasion, the drain valve will also come on if the water level is
too low, indicating too high a concentration and the need to dilute the water in the cylinder. If the
water reaches the top of the cylinder before 100% FLA, the fill valve shuts Off via the sensor, and the
fill-boil-fill-boil cycle continues, cycling Off the red high water sensor light until the concentration
becomes high enough to reach 100% FLA. The above-described control process will then take over.
Figure 143 General diagram—humidifier operation
NOTE
The Liebert iCOM control monitors the condition of the air discharging from the unit to protect
neighboring electronic equipment. The Liebert iCOM will prevent the humidifier from
activating if the discharge air is near its saturation point. This protects against discharging
fog from the unit or condensation forming on the unit’s supply air baffles. This protection mode
is activated when the supply air leaving the unit is below 64°F (17.8°C) or above 55% relative
humidity. The Liebert iCOM screen will display “Humidifier Suspended.” The screen will
display “Humidifier Resumed” when the protection mode resets at 67°F (19.4°C).

A.1.1 Humidifier Water Supply and Plumbing

The fill valve is sized for an extended water pressure range of 30 to 80 psi.
For installations where water pressure is less than 15 psi, add a pressure boost pump and notify the
factory; a fill valve with an oversized opening will be supplied.
For installations where water pressure is greater than 80 psi, install a pressure reducing valve in the
water feed line to the unit.
With dirty or muddy water sources (e.g., some well sources), ensure proper filtration by adding an
external filter to the water line entering the unit. (Consult factory for accessories such as filters.)
NOTICE
Risk of improper water supply. Can reduce humidifier efficiency or obstruct humidifier
plumbing.
Do not use completely demineralized water with this unit. The water must contain minerals
for the electrode principle to work.
Do not use a hot water source; it will cause deposits that will eventually block the fill valve
opening.
A.1.2 Humidifier Water Connection

A copper compression olive type coupling for 1/4" O.D. soft copper tubing is provided with the unit and
requires no soldering for the water connection to the unit.
An isolating valve should ALWAYS be placed in the feed water line to allow service of the fill valve.
Each unit is fitted with a fill solenoid valve located on the base drain pan.
Flow openings are designed for water pressure from 30 to 80 psi and are protected by the built-in
strainer.
For inlet water pressure outside this range, the factory should be contacted.
Figure 144 Water connection to humidifier
3/8" Cold Water

Olive Connection
7/8" Drain
Connection
Use 7/8" ID Hose from Factory

A.1.3 Humidifier Startup and Operation

• Ambient temperature location for humidifier: 41 - 104°F (5 - 40°C).
• Relative humidity location for humidifiers: 5 - 80% RH.
Check to see that the unit is securely mounted on a level surface with the proper drain and water
supply. Check for correct voltage with appropriately sized service. Check that the steam distributor,
steam supply hose and condensate line are correctly installed and routed back to the unit.
Check all electrical connections for wires that may have become loose in shipping. Components
damaged because of loose connections are NOT under warranty.
Check electrode plugs to ensure they are pressed firmly onto the electrode pins. Important: Loose
connections will cause overheating of the cylinder plugs, possibly melting the plugs and/or cylinder.
1. Open the isolating valve in the feed water line to the unit.
2. Make sure the Liebert iCOM® is set high enough to call for humidification.
3. Turn on the main disconnect in the primary service feeding the unit and check that unit has
power at the primary terminal block.
4. Push the auto On/Off/Drain Switch to “On.”
Water will start to enter the cylinder through its bottom port and rise in the cylinder to a point
determined by the solid state control circuitry. It is not unusual upon initial startup for the water to
fill the cylinder and cycle on the red high-water sensor light.
The red light simply acts as a safety to shut off the fill valve and prevent overfilling. With the red
light on, the water in the cylinder will continue to heat and, after a few minutes, start to boil. After
the boiling of the water has lowered the water level below the sensor at the top of the cylinder, the red
light will go out and the fill solenoid will again open until the cylinder is again full. This cycling of the
red light and fill valve will continue until the unit's full output capacity is reached, after which the
water level will automatically lower itself in the cylinder. (The increased concentration allows for
lower electrode coverage while maintaining the same output.) When a stabilized condition is reached,
the water will be boiling close to the cylinder seam level. The solid state circuitry will maintain the
proper concentration in the cylinder by introducing short drains only when necessary. If the cylinder
is manually drained, the above process will repeat itself.
A.1.4 Low Water Conductivity

Should normalization of the unit be required immediately after startup, the installer may speed up
the process by artificially increasing water conductivity. During a fill cycle, the installer should
dissolve half a teaspoon of table salt (no more) in a cup of water and add it to the cylinder by means of
the fill cup attached to the plumbing section. Open the plumbing compartment and add salt solution
through cylinder outlet. Excessive amounts of salt will result in erratic operation of the unit; however,
normalization of the unit will occur automatically through the solid-state control sequence.
A.1.5 Cylinder Replacement
NOTICE
Risk of electrical malfunction. Humidifier operation beyond the usable life of the cylinder can
cause improper operation and equipment damage.
The steam cylinder is disposable and must be replaced at the end of cylinder life. Cylinder life
depends on water supply conditions and humidifier usage.
After an extended period of operation, the cylinder will be completely used, as indicated by the red
high-water sensor light illuminated on the cabinet. When this condition is reached, a new
replacement cylinder must be installed.
NOTE
The red light may come on during initial startup, but this does not mean the cylinder must be
replaced. See 10.0 Startup and 14.0 Operation.
Contact Emerson or your local Emerson representative to obtain a replacement cylinder. To obtain
the correct cylinder, supply the cylinder model from the white three-digit label on the cylinder, or
supply the model, voltage and serial number from the unit specification label.

Remove the Old Cylinder

1. Turn Off the water supply to the unit.
2. The old cylinder must be drained completely before removing. This is done by pushing the auto
On/Off/Drain switch to the “drain” position.
3. When the cylinder is empty, push the auto On/Off/Drain switch to the Off position.
! WARNING
Open all local and remote electric power disconnect switches and verify with a voltmeter that
power is Off before completing the next step in the cylinder replacement operation.
4. The power wires to the cylinder are attached by cylinder plugs to the electrode pins on top of the
cylinder. Pull these plugs off the pins.
5. Using a slotted screwdriver, loosen the steam hose clamp(s) and pull the steam hose off.
The cylinder is now ready to be lifted out of the unit.
Installing the New Cylinder

1. Leave the main disconnect open until the cylinder is completely installed and reconnected.
2. Ensure that the cylinder mounting stubs are seated properly in the allotted side mounting slots
within the unit.
3. The white sensor plug on all units is for the sensor pin, which always goes on the single pin offset
from the others.
4. Ensure that cylinder plugs are snug on the pins.
5. Replace loose-fitting plugs; loose plugs may generate enough heat to melt and destroy the plug,
and new cylinder plugs must be ordered.
Reverse the procedure to install a new cylinder.
Figure 145 Sensor pins, cylinder plugs
White
Sensor
1
Sensor Pin
Plug
Cylinder
Plug
Cylinder Pin
Cylinder Pin
Humidifier Maintenance
! WARNING
Open all local and remote electric power supply disconnect switches and verify with a
voltmeter that power is Off before performing maintenance on the humidifier. The plumbing
and electrical compartments contain high-voltage components and wiring. The access cover is
attached with screws. Access should be limited to authorized personnel only.
Extended Shutdown
Always drain the cylinder before disconnecting power to the humidifier for a period of extended
shutdown. Otherwise, the electrodes are subject to harmful corrosion, which drastically shortens the
cylinder life. Do not leave the switch in the DRAIN position indefinitely because the drain coil could
burn out. Leave the switch in the Off position and open the main external fused disconnect to stop
power to the humidifier. Close the shutoff valve in the water supply line feeding the humidifier.

A.1.6 Humidifier Troubleshooting

Terms Used
• FLA (Full Load Amps) are amps listed on the humidifier specification label.
• Short cycling occurs when the humidifier’s “On time” is less than 10 minutes upon a call for
humidity. To correct short cycling, all humidifiers have a capacity adjustment that allows the
output of the humidifier to be reduced to as low as 20% of rated output, thus extending the “on
time” required to maintain output.
• Foaming can occur when the impurities already in water reach an excess concentration as a
result of boiling away water and continued boiling agitates the contained water. The humidifier
electronics are designed to prevent foaming, although in extreme cases water will foam with little
concentration, making it necessary to increase the drain time of the water contained in the
cylinder. Foaming is normally caused by short cycling, a restricted drain or back pressure. The
foam generated in these instances is conductive and may lead to false full-cylinder indication if
the level of the foam approaches the top of the cylinder.
• Back pressure is the restriction of steam flow caused by long steam runs, improperly sloped
steam lines, elbows changing the direction of steam flow from horizontal to vertical without a
drain leg, any plumbing detail allowing the accumulation of condensate, undersized steam line,
improper steam distributor, downward air flow onto the distributor causing excess static pressure
at the steam outlets, or high static pressure ducts (not probable). To overcome excess static
pressure in the duct, use a fill cup extension kit. In downflow applications, a downflow distributor
should be used, but in some cases the fill cup extension will also be required.
• Reset unit (humidifier): To reset the humidifier, switch the auto On/Off/Drain switch at the front
of the humidifier to the Off position for at least five seconds, then switch it back to the On position.
• Monitored leg is the primary wire to the cylinder that loops through the current sensing device
of the main PCB. This wire ends at the red cylinder plug at the cylinder.
Table 42 Humidifier troubleshooting
Unit Status Lamp
Yellow Green Symptom Corrective Actions
This usually happens on initial start-up after replacing the cylinder
Maximum water level (normal). Water is concentrated with minerals inside the cylinder. Let
On On
inside cylinder. unit run; yellow light will disappear when the unit is at full output. This
may take a day or two.
Check for main power supply fault. Turn power switch to 'Drain'
position. If drain valve is activated (sound of solenoid), check
Off Off No power to the board. connection to the board or board itself. When no sound is present,
check fuse (replace with 3.0 A if needed), transformer (voltage should
be present between fuse holder and ground screw).
Excess current. Operating
amperage exceeded Check drain valve operation, drain time, possible drain restrictions.
1 flash 130% of rated amps. Check fill valve for leaks (not holding supply water). Back pressure
Off
sequence Water is drained from the may also cause very conductive water conditions. Was the humidifier
cylinder (drain valve on for short cycling? Check for short cycling. Water conductivity too high.
10 minutes).
Check water level in the cylinder - should be more than 1/4 full. If not,
check fill rate, 24 VAC voltage on fill valve terminals (unit must be on
with call for humidity - green light on steadily). Verify fresh water
No current detection for 30
2 flashes in supply to the humidifier. Leaking drain valve may be at fault (minerals
Off minutes with continuous
sequence blocking the plunger). If cylinder is more than 1/4 full, check primary
call for humidity.
power, connections to the cylinder, continuity of wires to cylinder. Are
power wires connected to proper terminals on the cylinder? (Color
coding.) Possibly wrong cylinder type. Low water conductivity.
Check water level in the cylinder; should be about 3/4 full. Check for
4 flashes in End of cylinder life -
Off foaming if water level is lower or cylinder life shorter than expected.
sequence change cylinder.
Change cylinder, clean drain valve.

Remote Rack Sensor Troubleshooting
APPENDIX B - REMOTE RACK SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING

If the sensor has been set up correctly and is communicating to the Liebert CRV, then the status of
the LED (DS1) located on the sensor circuit board will be solid green.
Figure 146 CANbus and Ethernet cable wiring
Six-wire CANbus cable with RJ -12 long body connectors ; suitable for Liebert iCOM board with THB , HCB and
Liebert iCOM display connections
1 1
Pair 1
2 2
3 3
Pair 2
4 4
5 5
A Pair 3
6 6
Straight-through Ethernet cable with RJ 45 connectors ; suitable for U 2U connection or for connecton of
the Liebert iCOM Large Coldfire Display ; all through switch or hub
1 1
Pair 1
2 2
3 3 Pair 3
4 4
Pair 2
5 5
6 6
A
7 7
Pair 4
8 8

Remote Rack Sensor Troubleshooting
B.1 STARTING POINT

Auto On/Off/Drain switch in On position—unit will not fill:
When the On/Off control circuit is made and the Auto On/Off/Drain switch is pushed to On, the 24V
holding coil of the primary contactor should energize. The resulting magnetic pull closes the high
voltage contacts with a distinct and audible “clunk.” If the contactor will not make the connection,
then inspect the following while referring to the wiring diagram:
• Check for 24V across terminals 18 and 26 on the PC board.
• The low-voltage 3A fuse located in the control box may be blown.
• The contactor holding coil may be open or shorted.
• The switch may be defective.
Recheck that the Auto On/Off/Drain switch is still On. If it is, shut off the main disconnect and check
fuses or breaker of the main disconnect. If they are serviceable, turn power back on.
To test for a defective Auto On/Off/Drain switch, connect a wire from the fuse directly to Terminal 6
on the external controls strip. If the contactor activates, the On side of the switch is defective. If the
contactor does not activate, the PC board could be defective.
If the 3A control fuse blows when the wire from the fuse touches Terminal 6 on the external controls
strip, the contactor holding coil may be shorted. Replace contactor if necessary.
After the necessary components have been replaced and the contactor pulls in, there is line voltage to
the cylinder and the control sequence can begin.
Approximately 30 seconds after the contactor pulls in, the fill valve coil should energize. There is also
a visible fill relay on the printed circuit board. It is the one located farthest from the C.T. core. The
points on this relay must be touching in order for the fill valve coil to be energized. If the points do not
touch after the built-in time delay, the sensor input may be interfering. To confirm, remove the black
and red sensor wires from terminals 6 and 10 on the PC board. Wait 30 seconds and, if the fill relay
points do not touch, replace the sensor. If they still do not touch, the basic PC board may be faulty. To
confirm, disconnect the red wire from terminal 18 and touch it to terminal 14. If the fill valve coil
activates, the basic PC board should be replaced. If it still does not activate, the fill valve coil should
be replaced. After the necessary components have been changed, water will start filling the cylinder
and begin to submerge the electrodes. Because of the high voltage across the electrodes, the water can
now conduct electricity.
Red “Change Cylinder” light on—Water at top of cylinder:
This is a common occurrence on startup. See 10.0 Startup and 14.0 Operation.
Water remains at high level and won't concentrate:
This is normal on cold startup and can be accelerated by adding a maximum of 1/2 tsp. of dissolved
salt to the cylinder on fill cycle through the plastic fill cup. See A.1.4 Low Water Conductivity.
If the unit has been operating extensively, observe for normal fill-boil-fill-boil cycle; no drainage
should occur. If drainage occurs, check for leaking drain valve or back pressure.
Unit drains continually:
May be caused by foaming and/or back pressure or by a leaking drain valve.
If cylinder is almost empty, check for magnetic pull on drain solenoid indicating miswiring. If there is
no pull, drain actuator is blocked open; remove, disassemble and clean.
If drain is occurring through activated drain valve, valve is miswired or electronics are faulty; consult
factory.
If drain is occurring through the overflow on the fill cup, this is due to abnormal restriction on the
steam line and back pressure forcing water out of the cylinder so water cannot concentrate and level
remains high. Review installation of steam line to ensure there are no blockages or excessive static
pressure in the air system.

Technical Support / Service
Web Site
www.liebert.com
Monitoring
liebert.monitoring@emerson.com
800-222-5877
Outside North America: +00800 1155 4499
Single-Phase UPS & Server Cabinets
liebert.upstech@emerson.com
800-222-5877
Outside North America: +00800 1155 4499
Three-Phase UPS & Power Systems
800-543-2378
Outside North America: 614-841-6598
Environmental Systems
800-543-2778
Outside the United States: 614-888-0246
Locations
United States
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186
Columbus, OH 43229
Europe
Via Leonardo Da Vinci 8
Zona Industriale Tognana
35028 Piove Di Sacco (PD) Italy
+39 049 9719 111
While every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy Fax: +39 049 5841 257
and completeness of this literature, Liebert Corporation assumes no Asia
responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of
this information or for any errors or omissions.
29/F, The Orient Square Building
© 2014 Liebert Corporation F. Ortigas Jr. Road, Ortigas Center
All rights reserved throughout the world. Specifications subject to change Pasig City 1605
without notice. Philippines
® Liebert is a registered trademark of Liebert Corporation.
All names referred to are trademarks +63 2 687 6615
or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Fax: +63 2 730 9572
SL-11975_REV9_04-14
Emerson Network Power

Liebert
www.emerson.com
www.EmersonNetworkPower.com

Liebert CRV User Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Liebert CRV User Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Liebert® CRV™ Row-Based Cooling System

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

MODEL NUMBER NOMENCLATURE - 25 DIGIT CONFIGURATION NUMBER 1

CW = 040 (600mm [24in.] wide, 2000mm height) Digit 16 - Unit Color

1.0 LIEBERT CRV COMPONENT LOCATION

Figure 1 Component location, common components—600mm (24") models

Figure 2 Component location—Liebert 300mm (12") CR019 DX units

1 Top electrical entrance

Figure 3 Overall dimensions, service area—600mm (24") models

For proper airflow distribution:

Access required for installation of

Figure 4 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") DX models

Access Required to Service the Unit

A S B FRONT HOT AIR

Table 2 Overall dimensions, service area—300mm (12") models

2.1 Product Description

Figure 5 Liebert CRV, front and rear views

Front Rear Front Rear

2.1.1 SmartAisle™ Configuration

Typical SmartAisle Components

3.0 INSPECTION AND UNPACKING

3.1 Equipment Inspection

3.1.1 Packing Material

Table 4 Weights without packaging

Table 5 Shipping weights

3.2.1 Handling the Unit While it is Packaged

3.3 Moving the Unit Using Rigging—600mm (24") Models

Figure 8 Moving the unit using rigging

3.4 Unpacking the Liebert CRV—600mm (24") Models

Figure 9 Unpacking the Liebert CRV

3.5 Removing the Unit from the Skid

Figure 10 Removing the 600mm (24") unit from the skid

4 Bolts on Each Side

3.6 Reattaching the Baffle Panel—600mm (24") Units

9/16" Hex Head

4.0 PREPARING THE LIEBERT CRV FOR INSTALLATION

Figure 12 Adjust leveling feet—600mm (24in.) and 300mm (12in.) units

Adjust the height

600mm (24in.) Unit

300mm (12in.) Unit

Adjust the height of

Tighten this jam nut against the

5.1 Fluid Connections

5.2 Refrigeration and Hydraulic Circuits

Liebert CRV Unit and Associated Piping

CR035 Digital Digital Low Pressure Transducer

Isolation Valve *Isolation Valve

Factory Refrigerant Piping

Outdoor Lee-Temp Condenser

LIEBERT CRV AND ASSOCIATED PIPING

Factory Refrigerant Piping * Components are not supplied by

Liebert MC Condenser Liebert MC Condenser

LIEBERT CRV UNIT AND ASSOCIATED PIPING

Sensing Evaporator Coil

Factory Refrigerant Piping * Components are not supplied by

Figure 16 General arrangement—water-glycol units, 600mm (24") models

Vibration Evaporator Coil

Figure 17 General arrangement—chilled water, 600mm (24") models

NOTE: Schematic representation shown.

AB 3-Way Motorized Ball OR AB 2-Way Motorized Ball

Factory Refrigerant Piping

5.2.1 Condensate Drain Piping—Field-Installed